Home

Canon C500 Instruction Manual

1. Function name Description CAMERA MEDIA LL Photo Records a photo o 159 FUNC Enters the direct setting mode replicating the function of the camera s FUNC button e 66 FUNC Shutter Enters the direct setting mode with the shutter speed highlighted and ready to be e E 68 adjusted FUNC ISO Gain Enters the direct setting mode with the ISO speed or gain value highlighted and ready e E 70 to be adjusted FUNC WB Enters the direct setting mode with the white balance highlighted and ready to be e E 76 adjusted S amp F Frame Rate Allows you to set the shooting frame rate during slow amp fast recording mode e 109 My Menu Opens the My Menu customized submenu e 30 Initialize Media Opens the Initialize Media submenu o o 45 LENS EXCHANGE Turns the lens exchange mode on off o 34 oe Customizable slot Assign to the button any menu setting you would like to register e o Function can be used only by assigning it to a button 113 114 Custom Picture Settings Custom Picture Settings You can preset a number of picture related settings LZ 117 for clips recorded on a CF card or video output from the various terminals except the 3G SDI terminals and MON terminals After changing individual settings to your preference you can save the whole set in the camera or SD card as a custom picture file You can then load the file at a later date to change the current
2. System priority 2K System frequency Mode Resolution 1 Ne 12 bit 2048x1080 23 98P 99 94 Hz 29 97P o 90 00 Hz Frame rate 1 99 94P 25 00P 50 00P Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate 24 00 Hz 24 00P Ne 10 bit 2048x1080 Mee vy 10 bit 2048x1080 We hh 12 bit 1920x1080 Kazu 10 bit 1920x1080 Mee vy 10 bit 1920x1080 Recording MXF Clips on a CF Card During 4K and 2K Modes While recording on an external recorder in 4K and 2K modes the camera can simultaneously record an MXF clip on a CF card inserted in the camera except during special recording modes The selected video configuration for 4K and 2K modes will be converted to HD video and recorded onto the CF card You can select the video configuration of the MXF clips that are recorded on the CF card Video configuration recorded on CF card Video configuration for external recording Video configuration recorded on CF card System priority Recording mode Resolution Frame rate Bit rate Resolution Frame rate 59 94P 29 97P 29 97P 50 Mbps 1920x1080 T 4096x2160 23 98P 35 Mbps 1920x1080 23 98P 3840x2160 50 00P 25 Mbps 1440x1080 4K 25 00P 25 00P 24 00P 50 Mbps 1920x1080 24 00P HRAW 4096x1080 59 94P 50 Mbps 1280x720 59 94P 4K1K RAW 3840x1080 50 00P 35 Mbps 1280x720 50
3. Clips recorded using Canon Log gamma need to be processed in post production During post production you can apply a LUT lookup table to clips recorded using Canon Log gamma to view the clips with more natural colors For details about available LUTs visit your local Canon Web site You can also apply a LUT to the MON terminal or HD SD SDI terminal output Setting CINEMA Preset 1 Open the fa CINEMA Locked submenu PER Camera Setup amp E CINEMA Locked 2 Select On and then press SET e All picture related settings will be set according to the CINEMA preset values As such you will not be able to adjust custom picture settings e 2 LOCKED appears on the left of the screen Checking Clips Recorded with Canon Log Gamma View Assistance When Canon Log gamma is used the image displayed on the screen will appear darker than usual When you are shooting with Canon Log gamma and are checking the picture on an external monitor connected to a MON terminal or the HD SD SDI you can apply a LUT to the output QA 148 In addition you can use the view assistance function to display an image that approximates the one that would be obtained using normal gamma settings View assistance is only applied on the camera screen it will not affect your recordings or the video signal output from the various terminals 1 Open the View Assist submenu LA LCD VF Setup 9 View Assist 2 Select On and then press SET will app
4. 64 09 489 0300 SINGAPORE Canon Singapore Pte Ltd 1 HarbourFront Avenue 04 01 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 65 6799 8888 ta 65 6799 8882 UNITED KINGDOM Canon UK Ltd CCI Service Centre Unit 130 Centennial Park Borehamwood Hertfordshire WD6 3SE 0844 369 0100 USA http pro usa canon com CANON U S A INC http pro usa canon com support 855 CINE EOS 855 246 3367 USA only Visit your local Canon Web site to download the latest version of this Instruction Manual CANON INC 2014 PUB DIE 0441 001A
5. 1 Open the Initialize Media submenu f Other Functions Initialize Media 2 Select CF A CF B or SD Card and then press SET Initialize Media To initialize a CF card 3 Select OK and then press SET 4 When the confirmation message appears press SET e The CF card is initialized and all the data it contains is erased f Other Functions To initialize an SD card 3 Select Complete complete initialization or Quick quick initialization and then press SET 4 Select OK and then press SET e f you are using the Complete initialization option press SET twice to cancel the operation while it is in progress You can use the SD card but all data will be erased 5 When the confirmation message appears press SET e The SD card is initialized and all the data it contains is erased weonraNT e Initializing a recording media will permanently erase all data including clips with an f mark protected photos and custom picture files Lost data cannot be recovered Make sure you save important recordings in advance e Depending on the SD card the complete initialization may take up to a few minutes 45 46 Preparing Recording Media 1 NOTES e While recording on a CF card you can initialize another CF card in the other CF card slot e f you set an assignable button to Initialize Media LL 111 you can press the button to open the initialization submenu Switching Between the CF Card Slots
6. EDGE MON Turns the edge monitor on off o 100 MAGN Turns magnification on off o 80 Color Bars Turns color bars on off e 99 Markers Turns onscreen markers on off o 82 LCD Setup Opens the LCD Setup submenu o e 38 VF Setup Opens the VF Setup submenu e e 38 LCD VF B amp W Turns the B amp W mode of the LCD and viewfinder on off o o 38 View Assist Turns view assistance on off o 58 LUT Turns the LUT from the MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminals on off o 148 Resize MON Switches the resizing method of the MON 1 terminal output in the following sequence Output Letterbox Squeeze Side Crop 7 P Resize MXF Switches the resizing method of MXF clips in the following sequence e E 63 Output Letterbox gt Squeeze gt Side Crop re rea no oU amana Sac O omma D Daan fs Add Shot Mark 1 Adds an Ei mark to the clip o o 102 Add Shot Mark 2 Adds an Bl mark to the clip o e 102 Add M Mark Adds an Ii mark to the clip o e 134 Add PA Mark Adds a M mark to the clip o o 134 Time Code Displays the Time Code submenu o 84 Time Code Hold Puts the time code display on hold or resumes it o o 85 Headphone Increases the headphone volume o o 131 Headphone Reduces the headphone volume o e 131 Audio Output CH Switches the audio channel for audio output from the terminal o o 131 Audio Level Turns the audio level meter on off o o 94 95 Assignable Buttons
7. However only Color will be applied to an external monitor PEAKING connected to the MON 1 terminal Perform the following procedure p to adjust the peaking gain on an external monitor M A Qo To adjust the peaking gain on an external monitor 1 Open the Peaking Gain submenu 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 MON 1 amp Peaking Gain 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to set the level and MON 1 then press SET Peaking Gain Magnification 1 Press the MAGN button e X appears at the lower center of the screen and the center of the picture is magnified approximately 2 times 10 Adjusting the Focus e A white frame representing the whole screen area Is displayed on the top left of the screen The orange frame within it represents the approximate part of the image shown magnified 2 f necessary use the joystick AW lt p or SELECT dial to move the orange frame around and check other parts of the image e You can move the orange frame 5 steps vertically or horizontally Press the CANCEL button to return the magnification frame to the center position 3 Press the button again to cancel the magnification he magnification that appears on the LCD screen viewfinder screen and external monitor is different The magnification also differs based on the video configuration 1 NOTES e Peaking appears on the camera screen and an external monitor connected to the MON 1 terminal Mag
8. Names of Parts Operation panel 20 8 9 10 11 DISP GIES a WFM ye 16 17 18 DISP display button LL 55 129 Bl stop button QA 128 Assignable button 14 1 111 WFM waveform monitor button LL 100 Assignable button 8 LL 111 lt q skip backward button QA 130 Assignable button 13 LZ 111 EDGE MON edge monitor button QA 100 Assignable button 9 LZ 111 INDEX button LL 128 lt q fast reverse playback button A 130 Assignable button 10 LZ 111 P HT polay pause button LL 128 Assignable button 11 LL 111 P fast playback button LZ 130 Assignable button 12 LL 111 sans xus nee INDEX MENU CANCEL 12 10 gt P skip forward button LL 130 Assignable button 15 LZ 111 11 XLR terminal switches for CH1 top and CH2 bottom LL 93 12 Protective cover for XLR audio controls LL 94 13 switches for CH1 top and CH2 bottom LL 94 14 dials for CH1 top and CH2 bottom LL 94 15 START STOP button LL 51 16 MENU button LL 29 17 Joystick Q 29 SET button LL 29 18 CANCEL button LZ 29 4K Workflow Overview 4K Workflow Overview The following illustrates the typical 4K workflow for this camera Operating modes CAMERA AK Recording Post production RAW data Full quality data e o External 4K Aam Color recorder Ara radin Development 9 9 RAW recording A x P CF car
9. Rec Run The time code runs only while recording so clips recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time codes Free Run The time code starts running the moment you press SET to select this option and keeps running regardless of the camera s operation Regen The camera will read the selected CF card and the time code will continue from the last recorded time code on the CF card The time code runs only while recording so clips recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time codes 00 00 TC UB Setup Time Code Mode V Preset 00 00 TC UB Setup Time Code Run Free Run When a procedure requires selecting an option the available options are listed within or after the procedure Brackets are used to refer to menu options as they are displayed on screen When a function requires the use of the menu the quick reference shows the submenus and when applicable the default setting for the menu item The example illustration indicates that you can find the function by selecting the 00 00 TC UB Setup menu and then the Time Code menu item Supplied Accessories Supplied Accessories The following accessories are supplied with the camera Monitor Unit Handle Unit Body Cap Battery Charger CG 940 incl power cord BP 955 Battery Pack Eye Cup Viewfinder Cap CA 940N Compact Power Adapter incl terminal cover incl power
10. Selecting Drop or Non Drop Frame When 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 4K 4096 3840 2K 2048 1920 or MXF Frame Rate is set to 59 94P 59 941 or 29 97P you can select between a drop frame DF or non drop frame NDF time code depending on how you plan to use your recordings When Frame Rate is set to any other setting the time code is set to non DF NDF drop frame NDF and cannot be changed 00 00 TC UB Setup Time Code DF 1 Open the DF NDF submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 9 DF NDF 2 Select DF or NDF and then press SET e The time code display will differ depending on the setting When you select DF the time code will appear as 00 00 00 00 when you select NDF it will appear as 00 00 00 00 Putting the Time Code Display on Hold If you set an assignable button to Time Code Hold LL 111 you can press the button to freeze the display of the time code While the time code display is put on hold H will appear on the screen next to the time code and HOLD will appear on the rear panel The time code continues to run normally while the time code display is on hold When you resume the time code display the current time code will be displayed he time code display from the video output terminals will be put on hold The time code data that is superimposed on the output from the TIME CODE terminal 3G SDI terminals MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminal will n
11. When Camera Setup 9 CINEMA Locked is set to On or a custom picture file is not selected custom picture settings cannot be adjusted using the RC V100 Set CINEMA Locked to Off or select a custom picture file C1 to C9 LL 114 Turn off the camera reconnect the remote controller and then turn the camera back on again Connections with External Devices Video is not recorded on an external recorder Make sure the camera is connected to the external recorder correctly LT 41 Check the external recorder s instruction manual to make sure that the external recorder is set to receive the signal being output by the camera Video noise appears on a nearby TV screen When using the camera in a room where a TV is located keep a distance between the compact power adapter and the power or antenna cables of the TV Playback looks fine on the camera but there is no image on the external monitor The camera is not connected correctly to the external monitor Make sure you are using the correct connection LL 146 The video input on the external monitor is not set to the video terminal to which you connected the camera Select the correct video input The camera is connected using a commercially available HDMI cable but there is no picture or sound from the external monitor Disconnect the HDMI cable and then restore the connection or turn the camera off and then on again List of Messages Refer to this se
12. oy e HDMI OUT BNC cable terminal commercially z osp sp ova HDMI cable q H TE commerciall S terminal rcially available O gamn BNC cable commercially available q a0 m HDMI IN im mm 4m HD SDI IN Connecting to an External Monitor Using the MON 1 and MON 2 Terminals During 4K and 2K modes the camera can output video from the MON 1 and MON 2 terminals MON terminals The signal that is output from the MON terminals also includes audio time code metadata and clip name information In addition the camera can apply onscreen markers zebra patterns peaking and 147 magnification to the MON 1 terminal output Perform the following procedures to enable output from the MON terminals and to adjust other related settings Magnification will simultaneously be applied to the MON 2 terminal output Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K Enabling Output from the MON Terminals 1 Open the Output submenu 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup 3K AK 2K MXF Setup gt MON 1 amp 2 amp Output 2 Select On and then press SET MON 1 amp 2 e Output is enabled for the MON terminals Guam e f you do not intend to use the MON terminals select Off Doing so ical will also conserve the camera s power On Selecting the Resolution of the Output When the resolution of the video configuration is 3840x2160 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup 3840x1080 or 1920x1080 the resolution of the outp
13. CAMERA MXF 1 Set the system priority to MXF LT 64 2 Open the Special Rec submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 Special Rec 3 Select Pre Rec and then press SET e PRE REC STBY appears at the top of the screen 4 Press the START STOP button to begin recording e The tally lamp illuminates e PRE REC STBY changes to PRE REC while recording 5 Press the START STOP button again to stop recording e The camera records the clip including approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before the START STOP button was pressed e The tally lamp goes out and PRE REC STBY appears at the top of the screen 1 NOTES e You can use only one special recording mode at a time e Pre recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off It will be deactivated also if you change the video configuration e During pre recording mode the time code will be recorded with the running mode LL 84 set to Free Run regardless of the previous setting Alternatively you can use an external time code signal When the time code is recorded it will include the 3 seconds before the START STOP button was pressed When special recording mode is deactivated the running mode will return to its previous setting Customization 111 Assignable Buttons The camera allows you to assign various functions to 15 buttons By assigning often used functions you can quickly access them with a single
14. 1 Open the Copy IR Clips submenu f Other Functions Clips amp Copy I Clips Clips 2 Select OK and then press SET e All of the clips with an I mark on the selected CF card will be copied Copy M Clips to the other CF card e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the clips are being copied you can press SET to cancel 3 When the confirmation message appears press SET 136 MXF Clip Operations 1 NOTES e You cannot copy a clip if either CF card slot cover is open e f a clip is being copied to a card that already has a clip with the same number the last 4 digits in the clip name then the copied clip will be renamed with the following number Deleting Clips You can delete any clip except those with an f mark To delete such clips delete the f mark beforehand Deleting a Single Clip 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Delete Clip and then press SET e he clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 3 Select OK and then press SET e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the clip is being deleted the operation cannot be canceled 4 When the confirmation message appears press SET Deleting All Clips Other Functions 1 Open the Delete All Clips submenu f Other Functions 9 Clips 99 Delete All Clips Clips 2 Select OK and then press SET e All of the clips exc
15. 3 5 mm stereo mini jack OO to 12 dBV 16 Q load volume range Min to Max 50 Q or less GENLOCK Terminal BNC jack input only 1 Vp p 75 Q TIME CODE Terminal BNC jack input output Input 0 5 Vp p to 18 Vp p 10 kQ Output 1 Vp p 75 Q REMOTE Terminal 2 5 mm stereo mini jack e WFT Terminal Proprietary connector for the optional WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter e GHIP Terminal oame as the grip unit connection terminal on the C300 C300 PL or C100 camcorder Power Others Power Supply rated 7 4 V DC battery pack 8 4 V DC DC IN Power consumption For each mode viewfinder LCD screen normal brightness HD SD SDI output on For 4K and 2K modes MON and 3G SDI output on simultaneous MXF recording at 50 Mbps During 4K mode RAW 4096x2160 59 94P 23 9 W 50 00P 22 9 W During 2K mode RGB444 2048x1080 59 94P 20 9 W 50 00P 20 9 W During MXF mode 50 Mbps 1920x1080 24 00P 12 4 W Maximum rated power consumption 31 0 W Operating Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Camera unit only 160 x 179 x 171 mm 6 3 x 7 0 x 6 7 in 160 x 179 x 177 mm 6 3 x 7 0 x 7 0 in Configuration with monitor unit 185 x 249 x 187 mm 7 3 x 9 8 x 7 4 in Configuration with handle unit and monitor unit 185 x 284 x 301 mm 7 3 x 11 2 x 11 9 in All dimensions are approximate 204 Specifications e Weight Camera unit only 1820 g 4 0 Ib 1930 g 4 3 Ib Camera with m
16. Frame Rec A pre defined number of frames will be recorded every time you press the START STOP button This mode is suitable for recording stop motion animation Slow amp fast motion recording Slow amp Fast Motion This mode allows you to change the shooting frame rate to achieve a slow motion or fast motion effect during playback Pre recording Pre Rec The camera will start recording approximately 3 seconds before you press the START STOP button This is especially useful when it is difficult to predict when to start recording Pre recording is available only in MXF mode Interval Recording Mode l 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup Set the interval and number of frames in advance Sound is not recorded in this mode During 4K and 2K modes MXF clips will not be recorded simultaneously on a CF card even if a card is inserted in the camera Interval Rec Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF Interval Configuring Interval Recording Mode 1 sec 1 Open the Interval submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 Interval Rec 93 Interval 2 Select the desired interval and then press SET e See the following table for the available intervals 3 Select Rec Frames select the desired number of frames and then press SET 4K AK 2K MXF Setup Available Intervals Interval Rec 1 sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 4 sec 5 sec 6 sec 7 Sec 8 sec 9 sec Rec Frames 10sec 15sec 20sec 30sec 40sec 50sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 4min 5min 6min Zmin 8min 9min
17. The camera features two CF card slots CF CF card slot A and CF CF card slot B If both slots contain a CF card you can switch between them as necessary SLOT SELECT Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K J 2K MXF Press the SLOT SELECT button e The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in green On the screen the CF card selected is indicated with a B mark next to the CF card icon and in the rear panel with a W mark on top of the CF card icon i NOTES e f both CF card slots contain a CF card and you open the cover of the selected slot the camera will automatically switch to the other slot e You cannot use the SLOT SELECT button to switch between CF card slots while recording e When using an optional WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter you can also switch j SLOT SEEGI between CF card slots remotely by pressing SLOT SELECT on the Wi Fi Remote screen Selecting the CF Card Recording Method The camera features two useful CF card recording methods relay recording and double slot recording Relay recording This function allows you to continue recording on another CF card without interruption if the CF card you are using becomes full Relay recording is available from CF card slot A to CF card slot B and vice versa Double slot recording This function records the same clip simultaneously to both CF cards which is a convenient way to make a backup copy of your recording while you reco
18. amp 4K 4096 3840 3 Mode is set to AK1K RAW Taking Photos in CAMERA Mode You can take a photo while the camera is recording a clip or is in record pause mode If a custom picture file is selected in advance it will be recorded with the photo Q 114 To take a photo set an assignable button to Photo in advance Operating modes CAMERA ere 2K MXE 1 Set an assignable button to Photo 0 111 2 Press the assignable button to take a photo e and the number of available photos appear on the upper right of the screen e f a custom picture file is selected it will be recorded with the photo e The SD card access indicator will flash as the photo is being recorded 1 NOTES e Photo recording is disabled while Wi Fi communication is turned on f Other Functions 3 Wi Fi Remote gt Select is set to a setting other than Off Capturing Photos in MEDIA Mode You can capture a photo from an MXF clip during playback pause To capture a photo set an assignable button to Photo in advance Operating modes MEDIA 1 Set an assignable button to Photo LT 111 2 Select the desired MXF clip and press the B E button to start playback 3 Pause the playback at the point you want to capture 4 Press the assignable button to capture a photo e The screen will momentarily turn black as if a camera shutter had released e and the number of available photos appear on the upper right of the screen e The SD car
19. e All f marks from clips on the selected CF card will be deleted e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the fli marks are being deleted you can press SET to cancel Delete All Q Marks 135 3 When the confirmation message appears press SET Copying Clips You can copy clips from one CF card to the other The copied clips will retain their original name Copying a Single Clip 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Copy Clip and then press SET e he clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation You can also check the available space on both CF cards 3 Select OK and then press SET e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the clip is being copied you can press SET to cancel 4 When the confirmation message appears press SET e The selected clip is copied to the other CF card and the screen changes back to the clip index screen Copying All Clips Other Functions 1 Open the Copy All Clips submenu f Other Functions 39 Clips 3 Copy All Clips Clips 2 Select OK and then press SET e All of the clips on the selected CF card will be copied to the other CF Copy AII Clips card e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the clips are being copied you can press SET to cancel 3 When the confirmation message appears press SET Copying All Clips with an Mark f Other Functions
20. e Press the If button to stop the playback and return to the index screen weonraNT e Observe the following precautions while the CF or CF BJ access indicator is illuminated in red Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed Gi NOTES e You may notice brief stops in video or audio playback between clips 129 Onscreen Displays 7 8 9 10 TEIRIBMERSE 11 LA 12 JETER 13 EFIE 14 ZunPEYNHTT NN EU 3 29 97P oA 15 4 e epp 18 5 RE r 19 CH1 a 4000 2 v E 20 Remaining battery time Q 56 Joystick guide QJ 130 Shutter speed LT 67 Aperture value LL 74 ISO speed Gain A 70 Recording date and time Playback operation Selected CF card Relay recording 10 M mark M mark LL 103 134 XC O00 AOON 11 Time code LL 84 12 Clip number Total number of clips 13 Bit rate LL 64 Recording mode LL 60 14 Resolution LL 62 64 15 Frame rate 1 60 16 Embedded custom picture file LZ 114 17 Output displays Q 151 18 User bit LL 87 19 Audio output channel LZ 96 20 Audio level meter 1 Appears when LA LCD VF Setup 6 Metadata Display 9 Camera Data is set to On Appears when LA LCD VF Setup 3 Metadata Display 9 Date Time is set to On When playing back clips that were recorded using
21. Cancel instead to cancel the operation 5 When the confirmation message appears press SET 1 NOTES e You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot with a protected file e By default file slots C8 and C9 are protected Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks After you add shot marks to a clip you can display an index screen that contains all the frames in a clip with either shot mark only the Bl mark or only the El mark When you play back a clip from this index screen playback will start from the frame indicated by the shot mark You can also perform other operations from this index screen such as adding and deleting shot marks 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Shot Mark and then press SET e The Shot Mark index screen appears which contains all the frames with shot marks in the clip Select instead Shot Mark 1 to display an index screen only of the frames with the El mark or Shot Mark 2 to display an index screen only of the frames with the EM mark e he time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame with the shot mark e Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen 77231 min Shot Mark ARB BENI J eee Hl 5 Time code of the STARO 00 14 48 11 00 14 51 26 frame with the shot mark Nov 3 2012 3 28 PM PRE REC 29 97P m AAOO78 CP 50 Mbps 1920x1080 00 00 15 00 1 NOTES e After you finish
22. Color space that retains the hues of DCI P3 which is a color space whose guidelines were established by the DCI Digital Cinema Initiatives and possesses a wider color gamut than that of DCI P3 and BT 709 SRGB DCI P3 has good color reproduction of subjects with high color intensity Because this color space extends the gamut of high intensity colors without changing hues you can use it for the DCI workflow just by adjusting the intensity C Gamut Cinema Gamut Color space developed by Canon and based on the specific characteristics of the camera s sensor Features a wider color gamut than that of DCI P3 Use this setting with workflows that require ACES color space BT 2020 Color space that meets ITU R BT 2020 standards which defines parameters for ultra high definition television 4K 8K _ on Ww S PAR Camera Setup Color Space BT 709 Visual range BT 709 DCI P3 Cinema Gamut jua ds BT 2020 Available color space and gamma Curve settings Selecting the Color Space The color space and gamma curve of the video output by the 3G SDI terminal and MON terminals depend on the combination of settings Terminal output Terminal iUd LUT setting ou j 145 setting setting Color space Gamma BT 709 BT 709 Canon Log DCI P3 DCI P3 Cano
23. Default Normal 1 Gain Adjusts the color intensity This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 Phase Adjusts the color phase This setting can be adjusted from 18 to 18 Default 0 R G The R G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan green and red magenta gradations This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 R B The R B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan blue and red yellow gradations This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 G R The G H matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta red and green cyan gradations This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 G B The G B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta blue and green yellow gradations This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 B R The B R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow red and blue cyan gradations This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 B G The B G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow green and blue magenta gradations This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 121 White Balance Adjusts the amount of white balance throughout the whole image R Gain Adjust the intensity of red tones This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 G Gain Adjust the intensity of green tones This setting can be adjusted from 50 t
24. Ge bah eo oS oe sinter ee Sh 97 MIC terminal a 92 Microphone 4 area T m 92 Microphone attenuator 95 96 Microphone sensitivity 0 0 0 0 eee eee 95 MON 1 2 terminals l l 41 Mene METTI m 35 MibimHR e TRWCERTICTTITTTZST TITO D 7D 64 My MenU Ud acere i emcee decidir d oa dw dn P CR 30 N PNE UIEUSI aoioeracic oo erace obo n ac oodd ei os 73 Non drop frame time code llus 85 O OK marks M 0 eee 103 134 Onscreen markers nanana aaa 82 On set color grading 00 ae 22 148 P x rr 80 Peripheral illumination correction 34 Phantom power microphone 93 Photos Copying custom picture files 164 Deleting aa acci aceto bar ds 162 Protecting PTT 163 VIOWING 432s aed see ehe RR cm Den 161 PL lens gegt llis m Sie Playback Qe es 128 IOS OR mem 161 Power supply Re n nn n n n n nn 29 ROADER swite s coss 26 Pre recording mode 00e eee 110 R cll 60 Rear panel 4a qnd ace tna es betes ane Eus E Ea x 57 Rec run time code ce ee ee 84 Recording wo 51 mios I 159 Recording mode ceres 60 Relay recording cee eee ees 46 Remaining battery 000 c eee ee 24 Remote operation lees 49 50 Resetting all camera settings 175 Resolution frame size lille 60 Reviewing an MXF clip
25. MON terminals not being synchronized Inverts the recorded image horizontally and or vertically This also inverts the image Scan Reverse Rec Both Vertical Horizontal Off output from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals HD SD SDI terminal and HDMI OUT terminal Character Rec On Off When this function is set to On all of the onscreen displays will be recorded on the CF card exactly as they appear on the screen Selects whether the START STOP button will be active or locked too when the TART STOP ff DotA edit ENER switch is set to key lock QA 53 124 Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays Customizing Onscreen Displays For details on which onscreen displays can be customized refer to Onscreen Displays LL 55 For details on the setting options refer to Custom Display 1 and Custom Display 2j LL 172 Operating modes CAMERA 1 Open the Custom Display 1 or Custom Display 2 submenu LA LCD VF Setup 99 Custom Display 1 or Custom Display 2 2 Select the desired onscreen display 3 Change the setting option and then press SET LA LCD VF Setup Custom Display 1 Custom Display 2 Saving and Loading Camera Settings Saving and Loading Camera Settings After you adjust custom picture settings and settings in the various menus you can save those settings on an SD card You can load those settings at a later date or on another C500 or C500 PL camera so that you ca
26. Off White Balance On Off Iris On Off ISO Gain 0n Off 2 p Shutter 0n Off Peaking On Off Magnification 0n Off View Assist On Off Lens On Off Custom Display 2 Remaining Battery Warning Normal Off Remaining Rec Time Warning Normal Off Rec Mode On Off Genlock On Off Time Code 0n Off Interval Counter On Off SD Card Status Warning Normal Off Temperature Fan On Off 4K 2K Mode 0n Off Bit Rate On Off Resolution On Off Frame Rate On Off Character Rec On Off Output Display 0n Off Rec Command On Off User Memo On Off User Bit 0n Off Audio Output CH 0n Off Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options CAMERA MEDIA LL Custom Display 2 Audio Level On Off o Wi Fi 0n Off o Es Date Time Date Time Time Date Off o 173 Metadata Display Date Time On Off e Camera Data On Off e g L Setting applies also to the MON 1 terminal output Not available in the Photos index screen or photo playback screen Audio Level Displays the audio level meter when set to On Custom Display 1 settings Custom Picture
27. Output HD Y HD Sync Blk Burst Composite Off Scan Mode P PsF HD SD Output HD Onscreen Disp On Off 151 SD Onscreen Disp On Off 151 Resize SD Output Letterbox Squeeze Side Crop 150 The default value depends on the country region of purchase Not available for 24 00 Hz recordings D Audio Setup menu Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options CAMERA MEDIA LL Audio Input XLR Rec Channel CH1 CH1 CH2 o x 93 XLR1 Mic Trimming 12 dB 6 dB 0 dB 6 dB 12 dB i XLR2 Mic Trimming XLR1 Mic Att On Off n l XLR2 Mic Att XLR ALC Link Linked Separated e 94 Limiter On Off e E 94 95 1 kHz Tone 12 dB 18 dB 20 dB Off 99 MIC Mode Automatic Manual e m MIC Level 0 to 99 50 o MIC Att On Off o E 96 Audio Output Channel CH1 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 AIAI e 96 Headphone Volume Off 1 to 15 8 e 131 Not available in the Photos index screen LA LCD VF Setup menu Menu item Submenu Setting options CAMERA MEDIA RA LCD Setup Brightness 99 to 99 0 o o Contrast 99 to 99 0 o o Color 20 to 20 0 o o 38 Sharpness 1to 4 2 e o Backlight Normal Bright e o VF Setup Brightness 99 to 99 0 o e Contrast 99 to
28. QA 111 you can press the button to open the 00 00 TC UB Setup 93 Time Code submenu Setting the User Bit The user bit display can be selected from the date or the time of recording or an identification code consisting of 8 characters in the hexadecimal system There are sixteen possible characters the numbers O to 9 and the letters A to F If user bit information is being received along with an external time code you can also record the external user bit on the recording media The user bit information can be output from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminals Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF 1 Open the user bit Type submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 User Bit 3 Type 2 Select the desired user bit type and press SET Setting the User Bit 00 00 TC UB Setup User Bit Type Setting e Select Setting to set your own identification code Time to use the time as user bit or Date to use the date as the user bit e f you selected Time or Date you do not need to perform the rest of the procedure If you selected Setting continue the procedure to set the identification code 3 Select Set and then press SET e The user bit setting screen appears with an orange selection frame on the leftmost digit e To reset the user bit to OO OO OO OO select Reset instead 4 Use the joystick AV or SELECT dial to select the first character and press SE
29. Shot Mark 1 Adds or deletes a B mark o 138 Add Shot Mark 2 2 l x Del Shot Mark 2 Adds or deletes a E mark o 138 Fewer Index Pics Decreases the number of thumbnails that are displayed o 138 More Index Pics Increases the number of thumbnails that are displayed e 138 Pause Switches to playback of a clip with playback paused on E E e E the selected frame Set Index Picture Sets the thumbnail used in the clip index screen e 139 Includes also the Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 index screens BR Mark index screen only 3 BA Mark index screen only Expand Clip index screen only Using the Clip Menu 1 Select a clip and then press SET e The clip menu appears Available functions depend on the index screen and which functions are enabled 2 Select the desired function and then press SET MXF Clip Operations e The function is enabled For some functions further action may be required Follow the onscreen directions e Press the CANCEL button instead to return to the clip index screen weonraNT e Observe the following precautions while the CF or CF BJ access indicator is illuminated in red Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera Do not open the cover of the either CF card slot 133 Displaying Clip Information Select Display Clip Info in the clip menu to display the selected clip s informati
30. TC In Out 2 Select In and then press SET Recording the User Bit of an External Signal The user bit of an external time code signal can also be recorded with the time code itself 1 Open the user bit Rec Mode submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 User Bit 3 Rec Mode 2 Select External and then press SET 1 NOTES Synchronizing with an External Device 00 00 TC UB Setup Time Code TC In Out in 00 00 TC UB Setup User Bit Rec Mode Internal e The Genlock signal synchronization stabilizes after approximately 10 seconds When the camera locks on an external Genlock signal will appear on the upper right of the screen If the external Genlock signal is incorrect or there is no input signal the external time code that is recorded may be incorrect time code is non drop frame NDF will appear on the rear panel While a time code signal is being received the external time code s drop frame bit will be used if the external When an external time code signal is received the camera s own time code will be synchronized to it and the synchronization will be maintained even if you disconnect the cable from the TIME CODE terminal However performing any of the following actions while the cable is not connected will cause the synchronization to be disrupted the correct time code will be restored once you reconnect the cable Turning the camera off on Changing the operating mode to MEDIA m
31. mode 3 HD SD SDI 3 Output to HD SD or Off You can display zebra patterns on an external monitor during HD output LL 83 Zebra patterns will not be output during SD output When the camera is connected via HDMI OUT terminal to an external monitor the video signal output from the HD SD SDI terminal will be the same as that from the HDMI OUT terminal Video output will automatically switch to HD or SD depending on the capability of the external monitor Set ED Video Setup in mepia mode or 3K AK 2K MXF Setup in camera mode 3 SYNC OUT 3 Output to HD Y HD component video luminance signal or Composite SD analog composite signal 144 Selecting the Color Space Selecting the Color Space You can select the color space of the video that is output from the 3G SDI terminal or MON terminals If you select a color space with a wider range of colors than that of BT 709 you can improve the color reproduction in the video When checking the output you will need a display device that is compatible with each color space Operating modes CAMERA 4k 2K 1 Open the Color Space submenu PAR Camera Setup 9 Color Space 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e The color space of the video output from the 3G SDI terminal and MON terminals will change accordingly Options BT 709 Standard color space that is compatible with sRGB specifications DCI P38
32. mode when Other Functions Fan is set to Automatic and the cooling fan is deactivated while you are shooting the cooling fan will start automatically Q appears on the screen The camera s internal temperature will rise if the cooling fan filter under the MON 3G SDI terminal cover has clogged 187 Replace the filter LT 196 adj appears on the screen The camera and lens cannot communicate normally Picture and Sound Screen displays turn on and off repeatedly The battery pack is exhausted Replace or charge the battery pack Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly Abnormal characters appear on the screen and the camera does not operate properly Disconnect the power source and reconnect it after a short time If the problem still persists perform one of the following actions e Disconnect the power source and press the RESET button This resets all the camera s settings to default values except for custom picture settings and the hour meter e Use the Other Functions 3 Reset 9 All Settings function This resets all the camera s settings to default values except for the hour meter Video noise appears on screen Keep a distance between the camera and devices that emit strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors MRI machines or high voltage power lines Horizontal bands appear on the screen This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors when recording
33. recording or playback conditions The effective usage time of the battery pack may decrease when recording in cold surroundings when using the brighter screen settings etc The typical shooting times listed below are approximate times for shooting with repeated operations such as start stop and power on off eu EF lenses with lens contacts draw power from the camera to operate some functions Effective usage times may decrease depending on the lens used Other accessories attached to the camera such as the optional WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter also draw power from the camera to operate Effective usage times will decrease when such accessories are used while shooting Approximate times when shooting in 4K mode The following are the shooting times with the monitor unit attached LCD screen and viewfinder on output from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminal on and when simultaneously recording an MXF clip 50 Mbps 1920x1080 23 98P Recording mode Pasolutidn Frame rate Usage time BP 950G BP 955 BP 970G BP 975 RAW 4096x2160 59 94P Recording maximum 80 75 110 115 Recording typical 45 45 65 70 50 00P Recording maximum 80 80 115 125 Recording typical 50 50 70 75 25 00P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 Recording typical 55 55 75 80 24 00P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 Recording typical 55 50 75 80 23 98P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 Recording typi
34. refer to Managing User Memo Profiles in the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual 2 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the camera 3 Open the metadata Setting submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 93 Metadata 3 Setting 4 Select SD Card and then press SET Metadata 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 5 Open the User Memo submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 3 Metadata 3 User Memo Setting 6 Select the file name of the desired user memo and then press SET e The MD icon appears on the right of the screen SD Card e Select Off to record clips without a user memo 1 NOTES 4 4K 2K MXF Setup e After you set a user memo do not remove the SD card while you are recording If the SD card is removed the user memo will not be added Metadata to the clip e You must set the user memo before you start recording for it to be User Memo added to the clip You cannot change the user memo already added to a clio using the camera but you can do so with the Canon XF Utility software Using Metadata Setting a User Memo Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations LL 50 you create a user memo profile and transfer it to the camera from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application Using the Wi Fi Remote application 98 you have two additional advantages over user memos created with Canon XF Utility you can change the user memo of the last clip recorded even if you did not specify a user memo i
35. s 3G SDI terminals After you develop the clips and export them to a full quality standard file type such as DPX they will be ready for color grading Visit your local Canon Web site to download the software and receive the latest information on it Refer to the instruction manual PDF file included with the software for details on its use Operating modes CAMERA 4K System Requirements These are the system requirements as of October 2013 The following are the minimum requirements Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 os 64 bit ver only regardless of OS Mac 0S X v10 7 or 10 8 CPU Intel Core i3 i5 i7 or Xeon GPU NVIDIA CUDA compatible GPU RAM 4 GB SDI expansion card AJA KONA 3G SDI with drivers v10 3 2 AJA KONA 3G SDI with drivers v10 4 2 Display 1024 x 768 resolution The following are the recommended requirements for previewing RAW clips with a frame rate of 24 fps Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 09 64 bit ver only regardless of OS meres CPU Intel Core i7 3 06 GHz Intel Xeon 2 8 GHz Quad Core GPU NVIDIA GeForce GTX680 NVIDIA Quadro K5000 for Mac RAM 16 GB Hard disk Any with read write speed of 300 MB s The computer must have the listed OS pre installed The following models are not compatible iMac Late 2006 Mac mini Mid 2007 MacBook Late 2006 Mid 2007 Late 2007 Early 2008 MacBook Air Early 2008 With a compute capability of 2 0 or higher Computers without a compatible GPU will hav
36. s REMOTE terminal The second is to attach the optional WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camera s WFT terminal to use the Wi Fi Remote application 49 Using the RC V100 Remote Controller You can connect the optional RC V100 Remote Controller to control the camera including the advanced recording functions from a distance The remote controller lets you turn the camera on navigate the menus and remotely control the aperture MD and shutter speed change picture related settings like the knee and sharpness and more Use the cable supplied with the remote controller to connect it to the camera For details on how to connect and use the remote controller refer to its instruction manual Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 1 Turn off the camera and connect the optional RC V100 Remote Controller to the camera f Other Functions 2 Turn on the camera and open the REMOTE Term submenu REMOTE Term Other Functions amp REMOTE Term 3 Select RC V100 and then press SET Standard Options RC V100 Select this option to use the optional RC V100 Remote Controller Standard Select this option to use commercially available remote controls 1 NOTES e The camera s ND filter cannot be changed using the ND button on the remote controller e The following controls on the remote controller will not operate the camera AGC button AUTO KNEE button AWB button ZOOM dial AF button and AUTO IRIS button e Ad
37. you can use an analog blackburst or tri level signal Connection Diagram GENLOCK terminal SYNC OUT terminal SYNC OUT TIME CODE terminal GENLOCK Time code synchronization synchronization Reference Video Signal Input Genlock Synchronization When a reference sync signal analog blackburst or tri level signal is input through the GENLOCK terminal the phases of the camera s V and H sync will automatically be synchronized to it The phase difference between the external Genlock signal and the camera is initially set to O The H phase can be adjusted within the range of approximately 0 4 H HD equivalent Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF 1 Open the Genlock Adjust submenu f Other Functions 9 Genlock Adjust 2 Adjust the phase to the desired level select Set and then press Genlock Adjust SET e Use the joystick AV or SELECT dial to select the value for each field and press SET to move to the next field f Other Functions Time Code Signal Input An external SMPTE standard LTC timing signal received from the TIME CODE terminal will be recorded as the time code The user bit of the external timing signal can also be recorded Before connecting the device set the TIME CODE terminal to input Also you must set the running mode of the time code to Free Run LL 84 Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF 1 Open the TC In Out submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 93 Time Code 3
38. 00 TC UB Setup Time Code 24P TC Sync Normal CAMERA mode 3K AK 2K MXF Setup MEDIA mode f Video Setup 3 SYNC OUT 3 Scan Mode setting SYNC OUT Not available for 24 00 Hz recordings Output Composite Synchronization signal summary Video configuration for recording SYNC OUT terminal i HD Sync e Sac Resolution Frame rate 2 J Blk Burst priority mode Normal XF Legacy 59 94P 1080 29 97 P PsF l 29 97P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i anil 4096x2160 23 98P 1080 23 98 P PSF 3840x2160 50 00P 4K 1080 25 00 P PsF 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 25 00P 24 00P 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 60 00i HRAW 4096x1080 59 94P 720 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 4K1K RAW 3840x1080 50 00P 720 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 59 94P 1080 29 97 P PsF l 29 97P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 12 bit 2048x1080 23 98P 1080 23 98 P PsF Te 10 bit 1920x1080 50 00P 2K 1080 25 00 P PsF 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 25 00P 24 00P 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 60 00i 2048x1080 59 94P 720 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i AZA 10 bit 1920x1080 50 00P 720 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i HRAW only Synchronizing with an External Device Video configuration SYNC OUT terminal HD Sync System priority Resolution Frame rate CAMERA mode Blk Burst 9 MEDIA mode Normal XF Legacy 59 94i 1080 59 94i 29 97P 1080 29 97 P PsF 1080 59 94i 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 23 9
39. 121 take precedence over the white balance settings e You can use the f Other Functions 9 Custom Function 3 Shockless WB setting QA 123 to make the transition look smoother when you change the white balance settings e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can adjust the white balance with the remote controller s A B PRESET and w buttons Setting the White Balance 1 Set the white balance mode using the direct setting mode e Press the FUNC button to highlight the white balance icon and select the desired white balance mode e To apply the setting as it is press SET To establish the custom white balance fine tune the preset white balance settings or change the color temperature continue the procedure as described below before pressing SET e For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode LL 66 If you selected one of the custom white balance settings 4A or HAB If a custom white balance has not yet been stored the custom white balance icon WA or 8B and default value 5 500 K will flash slowly To establish the custom white balance 2 Point the camera at a white object so that it fills the whole screen e Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording 3 Press the button e The A or B icon will flash quickly e Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed e After the icon stops flashing the procedure is co
40. 24 00 Hz recordings respectively Selecting the Recording Mode For 4K mode the recording mode determines whether the vertical resolution is 2160 pixels RAW or 1080 pixels HRAW or AK1K RAW For 2K mode it determines the color sampling and bit depth 1 Open the Mode submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 3 4K 4096 3840 or 2K 2048 1920 3 Mode 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup System Priority 4K 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup System Frequency 59 94 Hz or 50 00 Hz Depending on the country region of purchase 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup AK 4096 3840 Mode RAW Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate 2 Select the desired recording mode and then press SET 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup Available recording modes by system priority System priority Recording mode Description 2K 2048 1920 Standard recording mode for 4K clips This recording mode n features a 10 bit bit depth and should be used if you plan to Mode develop the clip using the Cinema RAW Development software LL 152 Rew 12 bit Recording mode for use with slow amp fast motion recording LL 108 when you want to set the shooting frame rate from 62 to 120P for 59 94 Hz recordings or 52 to 100P for 50 00 Hz recordings Recording mode that features half the vertical resolution of RAW recording You can set the shooting frame rate from 62 to 120P for 59 94 recordings or 52 to 100P for 50 00 Hz recordings This r
41. 25 00P 2 6 12 106 Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options I S amp F Frame Rate During 4K mode when Mode is set to RAW or 2K mode when Mode is set to MEZ 12 bit or EZ 10 bit For 59 94 Hz and 24 00 Hz recordings 1 to 30 32 to 60 24 For 50 00 Hz recordings 1 to 25 26 to 50 24 During 4K mode when Mode is set to HRAW 4K1K RAW or 2K mode when Mode is set to eg Vy 10 bit For 59 94 Hz and 24 00 Hz recordings 1 to 60 62 to 120 24 For 50 00 Hz recordings 1 to 50 52 to 100 24 During MXF mode when Bit Rate Resolution is set to an option with 1080 vertical resolution 108 For 59 94 Hz and 24 00 Hz recordings 1 to 30 For 50 00 Hz recordings 1 to 25 During MXF mode when Bit Rate Resolution is set to an option with 720 vertical resolution For 59 94 Hz and 24 00 Hz recordings 1 to 60 30 For 50 00 Hz recordings 1 to 50 25 This range is in 2 fps increments When the shooting frame rate appears in brackets on the screen this indicates that both 3G SDI terminals are required for output Clip Name Title Prefix Two characters each B A to Z 0 to 9 AAT Number Setting Set Reset 0001 Metadata Setting Remote SD Card B User Memo Off list of user memo files available on the SD card Country Code Letters
42. 2K MXF Setup in camera mode 9 SYNC OUT 3 Output to HD Y HD component video luminance signal or Composite SD analog composite signal Video Output Configuration Video Output Configuration for MXF Mode Refer to the following table for the video output configuration from each terminal during recording and playback Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA MXF 143 VIdOOTCOHRQUTGIER HD SD SDI HDMI OUT SYNC OUT 9 terminal 4 terminal terminal 1 Resolution Frame rate ut ui SD HD SD HD SD cameRA mode menia mode 59 94i 1080 59 94i 99 97P 1080 29 97 P PsF 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 59 94i 480 59 94P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 23 98 23 98P 1920x1080 P PsF 1440x1080 50 00i 1080 50 00i 1080 25 00 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 1080 50 00i 576 50 00P 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 25 00P P PsF 24 00P 10002400 1080 60 00i 1080 60 00i 1080 60 00i P PsF 59 94P 720 59 94P 29 97P 720 29 97P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 720 59 94P 480 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 23 98P 720 23 98P 1280x720 50 00P 720 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 720 50 00P 576 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 25 00P 720 25 00P 24 00P 720 24 00P 720 60 00P 720 60 00P 720 60 00P l Depending on the signal you can switch between the P and PsF setting QJ 147 for output 2 Set Eb Video Setup in mepia mode or 3K AK 2K MXF Setup in camera
43. 45 To play back the recordings on the CF card set AK 2K MXF Setup 3 System Frequency to 24 00 Hz Recorded at 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz Check the data on CF A CF B Initializing the card is also recommended The CF card contains clips that were recorded using a system frequency other than the one currently used by the camera To record on this CF card save your clips LL 155 and initialize the CF card LL 45 To play back the recordings on the CF card set AK 2K MXF Setup 6 System Frequency to 59 94 Hz or 50 00 Hz as necessary so the camera matches the CF card SD card error You inserted a MultiMedia Card MMC into the camera Use a recommended SD card LT 43 Troubleshooting Shot Mark Error Could not add a shot mark If the message appears in camera mode try adding the mark again If that does not work add the mark in MEDIA mode after you finish recording If the message appears in MEDIA mode turn off the camera and then back on Then try to add the mark again System error 191 Turn off the camera and back on again If this does not solve the problem there may be a malfunction with the camera Consult a Canon Service Center This photo cannot be displayed You may not be able to display photos taken with other devices or image files created or edited on a computer 192 Handling Precautions Handling Precautions Camera Be sure to observe the following precautions to ensure maximum perfo
44. 50 00 Hz i P 52 to 100 52 to 100P When the shooting frame rate is enclosed by brackets on the screen this indicates that both 3G SDI terminals are necessary to record the 3G SDI output signal using an external recorder The signals output from 3G SDI 1 terminal and 3G SDI 2 terminal are the same Both 3G SDI terminals combine to output this signal 1 NOTES e Depending on the external recorder you may not be able to record at the desired video configuration Preparing Recording Media Preparing Recording Media The camera records MXF clips to CompactFlash CF cards and photos to Sa SD and 23 SDHC memory cards The camera is equipped with two CF card slots Initialize recording media LL 45 when you use them with this camera for the first time 43 he camera can record custom picture files and a camera settings file onto the SD card as well The SD card serves also to store S user memo files created with the Canon XF Utility software LL 155 that you can then read and embed in the clips metadata Compatible CF cards You can use UDMA compatible Type CF cards with a capacity of at least 512 MB with the camera For more details on cards that can be used visit your local Canon Web site The Ultra Direct Memory Access UDMA specification allows data to be transferred between the CF card and device at high transfer speeds measured in MB s Depending on the CF card you may not be able to record ev
45. A to Z numbers 0 to 9 plus sign minus sign colon Organization space _ User Code 3G SDI Output On Off 41 MON 1 amp 2 7 Output On Off 147 LUT On Off um Select BT 709 Wide DR DCI ACESPX10 Off MON 2 148 Resolution 2048x1080 1920x1080 147 Resize Output Letterbox Squeeze Side Crop 147 Scan Mode P PSF 147 MON 1 Peaking Gain Off 1 to 15 10 80 HD SD SDI Output HD SD Off LUT On Off T Select BT 709 Wide DR Scan Mode P PsF SYNC OUT Output HD Y HD Sync Blk Burst Composite Off Scan Mode P PsF 169 170 Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options RA HD SD Output HD Onscreen Disp On Off 151 Zebra HD Output On Off 83 SD Onscreen Disp On Off 151 Resize SD Output Letterbox Squeeze Side Crop 150 Rec Command On Off Set CF Card Slot Relay Rec On Off iG Double Slot Rec On Off The default value depends on the country region or purchase Available during 4K mode only Available during 2K mode only Available options depend on the system priority and system frequency settings Available during MXF mode only 6 Available options depend on the system frequency and resolution settings Available during 4K and 2K modes only 9 Not available for 24 00 Hz recor
46. Button 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAGN PEAKING ZEBRA WFM LENS EXCHANGE LUT Assign Button 2 2 MAGN PE WFM EDGE MON NONE NONE NONE 1 NONE NONE NONE 1 Assignable buttons 1 to 15 LJ 111 Assignable buttons 10 to 15 do not appear in MEDIA mode Audio Status Screen In CAMERA mode In MEDIA mode O AOUN XLR terminal recording channel LL 93 Microphone sensitivity XLR terminal LL 95 Audio peak limiter LL 94 95 Microphone mode MIC terminal LL 95 Microphone recording level MIC terminal LL 95 Audio 1 LGA NE a XLR ALC Link Separated 8 XLR1 Mic Trimming 0 dB XLR1 Mic Att Off 2 Mp Mic Trimming 0 dB 9 XLR2 Mic Att Off 3 Limiter Off ira OL A MIC Mode Automatic 5 gl Level 50 6 ihe Att Off O mE Volume 8 Audio Headphone Volume 8 i Microphone attenuator MIC terminal LZ 96 Headphone volume Q 131 Linking recording levels of XLR terminals Q 94 Microphone attenuator XLR terminal LL 95 O Audio reference signal LL 99 Qoo Displaying the Status Screens Media Status Screen 3B Recorded 11 2 GB Available 7 min m 181 32 0 GB Recorded 2 17 GB D NTEHEDINL E TER 1 CFcardA Approximate used space on CF card A 2 CF card B 8 Total space on SD card 3 SD card 9 Used space on SD card 4 Total space on CF card A 10 Available number of shots on SD card 5 Used space on CF
47. Camera Body 195 e Use a soft dry cloth to clean the camera body Never use chemically treated cloths or volatile solvents suchas paint thinner Lens e Remove any dust or dirt particles using a non aerosol type blower brush e Use aclean soft lens cleaning cloth to gently wipe the lens using commercially available cleaning fluid for eyeglasses Never use tissue paper LCD Screen e Clean the LCD screen using a clean soft lens cleaning cloth e Condensation may form on the surface of the screen when the temperature changes suddenly Wipe it with a soft dry cloth Viewfinder Viewfinder 1 Slide the viewfinder unit s LOCK RELEASE screw to the RELEASE position and remove the viewfinder unit by sliding it up 2 Wipe away dirt with a cotton swab 3 Reattach the viewfinder unit by sliding it back onto the camera and turn back the LOCK RELEASE screw to the LOCK position important e Be careful not to scratch the glass and screen when cleaning them 196 Maintenance Others Cooling fan Replacing the Cooling Fan Filter You can replace the cooling fan filter which is located under the cover of the MON 3G SDI terminals 1 Remove the cooling fan cover e Hold the top and bottom of the center opening and remove the Cover 2 Remove the filter 3 Attach the new filter 4 Reattach the cover e Hook the cover behind the lower tabs as shown in the illustration and then hook the cover behind the upper tabs 1
48. Clip Reviewing an MXF Clip When the camera is in CAMERA mode you can review the last clip that was recorded on a CF card f Other Functions Operating modes CAMERA 4k J 2K MXF Rec Review 1 Open the Rec Review submenu to set the review length Entire Clip f Other Functions 3 Rec Review 2 Select the desired option and then press SET 3 After you finish recording press the button e he last clip that was recorded is played back without audio for the selected duration gt REVIEW appears at the top of the screen e Press the CANCEL button to stop reviewing the clip and change the camera back to record pause mode e After the clip finishes playing back the camera returns to record pause mode Options Entire Clip Allows you to review the entire clip Last 4 sec Allows you to review just the last 4 seconds of the clip i NOTES e When you are using a special recording mode Q 105 you cannot review a clip e f the camera switched CF cards during a recording the camera will play back the clip on the CF card most recently recorded on Special Recording Modes Special Recording Modes The camera features 4 special recording modes Interval recording Interval Rec A pre defined number of frames at a pre defined interval will be recorded 105 automatically This mode is suitable for recording subjects with little movement such as natural surroundings or plants Frame recording
49. Displays the custom picture icon WM when set to On indicating that a custom picture profile will be recorded with a clip Focal Length Displays the current focal length of an attached EF lens when set to On ND Filter Displays the ND filter indicator when set to On Key Lock Displays the key lock icon when set to On White Balance Displays the white balance indicator when set to On Iris Displays the aperture setting when set to On ISO Gain Displays the ISO speed or gain setting when set to On Shutter Displays the shutter speed setting when set to On Peaking Displays the peaking icon EW or WWA when set to On Magnification Displays the screen magnification icon WHAI when set to On indicating that the image on the screen is being magnified View Assist Displays the view assistance icon KMS when set to On Lens Displays the lens warning icon fj when set to On indicating that the attached lens cannot communicate with the camera Custom Display 2 settings Remaining Battery Controls when the remaining battery indicator appears Warning Appears only when there is a warning Normal Always appears on the screen Remaining Rec Time Displays the remaining recording time Warning Appears only when there is a warning Normal Always appears on the screen Rec Mode Displays the recording operation indicator STBY in record pause mode for example w
50. Doing so will display the onscreen displays on an external monitor You must set this function separately for HD and SD output This setting will not affect your recordings Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MX 1 Open the HD Onscreen Disp or SD Onscreen Disp submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup in camera mode or E Video Setup in menia mode 3 HD SD Output amp HD Onscreen Disp or SD Onscreen Disp 2 Select On and then press SET Connecting to an External Monitor 151 NOS DC Side Crop setting NNI CAMERA mode 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup MEDIA mode EJ Video Setup HD SD Output HD Onscreen Disp SD Onscreen Disp Off appears on the upper right of the screen when L LCD VF Setup 9 Custom Display 2 3 Output Display is set to On 1 NOTES e Onscreen displays will not appear on an external monitor for SD output if 2 4K 2K MXF Setup in CAMERA mode or Video Setup in meoia mode 9 Resize SD Output is set to Side Crop e f you set an assignable button to Onscreen Display LL 111 you can press the button to turn on and off the superimposing of onscreen displays on video output from the camera s terminals simultaneously for HD and SD video 152 Developing RAW Clips Developing RAW Clips Use the Cinema RAW Development software to develop RAW clips recorded on an external recorder connected to the camera
51. EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCTS OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state CANON U S A INC CANON CINEMA EOS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon Canada Inc Canon Canada with respect to a the Canon Cinema EOS product and b the accessories for the Canon Cinema EOS Product if any packaged with this limited warranty collectively the Products and purchased in Canada This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase The Products are warranted to the original end user purchaser when delivered in new condition in its original container under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows Parts At Canon Canada s option defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original 211 purchase Labor For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase labor will be provided free of charge by Canon Canada s factory service center or designated service facilities located in Canada When returning Products under this warranty you must pre pay the shipping charges and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase with a complete
52. Image inverted horizontally and vertically gt Image inverted vertically gt Original image You can use the viewfinder and watch the LCD screen at the same time 1 NOTES e About the LCD and viewfinder screens The screens are produced using extremely high precision manufacturing techniques with more than 99 99 of the pixels operating to specification Less than 0 01 of the pixels may occasionally misfire or appear as black red blue or green dots This has no effect on the recorded image and does not constitute a malfunction You can set the LCD screen to black amp white 1 38 e When you use a commercially available lens adapter and the image on the screen is inverted you can use the Other Functions 39 Custom Function 39 Scan Reverse Rec setting to return the image to the correct orientation You can record this corrected image or have the camera output it from the 3G SDI terminal MON terminal HD SD SD terminall or HDMI OUT terminal If you are not interested in using the viewfinder while the monitor unit is attached you can set L L CD VF Setup 9 LCD VF Simul to Off to conserve the camera s power Even when LCD VF Simul is set to Off closing the LCD panel will automatically activate the viewfinder While recording with the LCD panel rotated in a different direction or angle for example facing toward the subject you can press the MIRROR button repeatedly to invert the image on the screen horizo
53. Only use attachments accessories specified by 7 Do not block any ventilation openings Install in the men uror mE accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 12 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as when ESO i long ere of Hs radiators heat registers stoves or other 13 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel apparatus including amplifiers that produce servicing is required when the apparatus has heat been damaged in any way such as power supply 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two Cab Sie Maye fallen Into the PPA ine blades with one wider than the other apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B Trademark Acknowledgements e SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of SD 3C LLC e CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation e The CF Logo is a trademark of CompactFlash Association e Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United otates and or other countries e Apple iMac Mac OS Macbook Macbook Air Final Cut Pro are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Avid Media Composer and NewsCuitter are trademarks or registered trademarks of Avid Technology Inc or its
54. Q 53 CAMERA at A MEDIA Set the switch to MEDIA e The camera switches to meDIA mode and the clip index screen appears 7 8 9 be gi TE Nov 3 3 23PM Nov 3 3 23PM_ Nov 3 3 23PM Nov 3 3 23 PM 4 1 1 2 F oT Nov 3 3 28PM Nov 3 3 28PM Nov 3 3 28 PM 5 2 4 12 Meloy 3 2012 3 28PM PREREC 29 97P VCS Cite 13 g AL i 50 Mbps 1920x1080 i II Z 14 15 16 17 128 Playing Back MXF Clips 1 BR mark M mark M 103 134 9 Currently selected CF card slot LZ 46 2 Orange selection frame 10 Clip number Total number of clips 3 Relay recording Appears when a clip begins on 11 Recording date month and day only and time one CF card and continues on the other QQ 46 12 Special recording mode LL 105 4 Shot mark LL 102 138 13 Time code of thumbnail 5 Recording date and time 14 Iotal recording time 6 Clip name LL 53 15 Embedded custom picture file LZ 114 Temperature warning icon QQ 186 16 Bit rate and resolution LL 60 8 Clip thumbnail LZ 139 17 Frame rate For clips recorded using slow amp fast motion mode the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed Switching Between the CF Card Slots If both CF card slots contain a CF card you can switch between them as necessary Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA SLOT SELECT O Press the SLOT SELECT button e The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in green Swit
55. Synchronizes the time code at a 30 frame signal and the signal from the GENLOCK terminal and SYNC OUT terminal at a 59 94i or 60 00i signal The SYNC OUT terminal outputs a 59 94i or 60 00i signal Normal Standard synchronization mode Synchronizes the time code at a 24 frame signal and the signal from the GENLOCK terminal and SYNC OUT terminal at a 23 98P or 24 00P signal The SYNC OUT terminal outputs a 23 98P PsF or 24 00P PsF signal 00 00 User Bit Setup menu v amp mode only Menu item Setting options I Output Mode Fixed Pulldown 91 Not available in the Photos index screen or photo playback screen f Other Functions menu Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options CAMERA MEDIA LL Reset All Settings Cancel OK o o Camera Settings Cancel OK o E Assignable Buttons Cancel OK o e Transfer Menu 82 Save To s2 Menu Menu 83 e e oe Load From s2 Menu Menu 82 o o Time Zone List of world time zones UTC 05 00 New York or UTC 01 00 o o 27 Central Europe Set Clock Date Time o o Date Format YMD Ee UH INUM MDY 24H e e 2 DMY DMY 24H WFM LCD Setting WFM VS Edge Mon Off e WFM VS Off o Waveform Monitor Line Line Spot Field RGB YPbPr o o 100 Gain 1x 2x o e Ve
56. Zebra 1 Level or Zebra 2 Level 4 Select a zebra level and then press SET 5 Press the ZEBRA button to activate the selected zebra pattern e Alternatively before closing the menu you can also select Zebra select On and then press SET 1 NOTES e You can use the 5k AK 2K MXF Setup 3 HD SD Output 3 Zebra HD Output setting to display the zebra pattern on an external monitor connected to the HD SD SDI terminal HD output only SYNC OUT terminal HD Y signal output only or HDMI OUT terminal HD output only 84 Setting the Time Code Setting the Time Code While recording the camera can generate a time code signal and embed it in your recordings You can have the camera output the time code signal from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals HD SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal J 91 In addition you can superimpose the time code on video output from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal While playing back video recorded on a CF card you can output the time code on the CF card from the HD SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal Additionally you can superimpose the time code on the picture from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal For recordings with a frame rate of 29 97P 59 94i or 59 94P you can also select between a drop frame and non drop frame time code To synchronize the camera s time code to an external time code generator refer to Synchronizing with an External Device LL 88 Op
57. apply a LUT and use it for on set color grading LL 22 Of course both sets of terminals also output audio SMPTE time code LTC and user bit signals In addition you can output the signal from the 3G SDI terminal with an extended color space L 144 Canon Log gamma for spectacular dynamic range The Canon Log gamma LL 58 makes full use of the sensor to give your recordings amazing dynamic range In 4K and 2K modes the camera will always use Canon Log gamma In MXF mode you may want to use CINEMA preset L 58 to set the camera easily and quickly for shooting with Canon Log gamma Operability and Adaptability Freely customizable compact design The modular components including the supplied handle unit and monitor unit will let you expand and adapt the configuration to match your shooting conditions LL 32 The articulated monitor unit can be rotated 270 for maximum convenience The 10 1 cm 4 in LCD screen with 10096 coverage ensures that you can compose your shots with ease Pro level connectivity In addition to the 3G SDI terminals mentioned previously the HD SD SDI terminal can output YCC 4 2 2 10 bit 8 bit effective HD SD video as well as audio and time code signals Genlock synchronization Q 88 the TIME CODE terminal LL 89 91 and SYNC OUT terminal allow the camera to be part of any multi camera shooting setup Customization The camera features several customization options You can assign often
58. black level Higher settings will make dark areas brighter but decrease contrast This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 Master Black Corrects color cast in blacks Red 50 to 50 Default 0 Green 50 to 50 Default 0 Blue 50 to 50 Default 0 Black Gamma Controls the lower part of the gamma curve dark areas of the image This setting is not available when Gamma is set to Canon Log Level Raises or lowers the lower part of the gamma curve This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 Range Selects the range in which dark areas are affected This setting can be adjusted from 5 to 50 Default 0 Point Determines the shape of the lower part of the gamma curve This setting can be adjusted from 1 to 50 Default 0 Black Gamma Output Custom Picture Settings Low Key Satur Adjusts color saturation in dark areas Enable Activates deactivates the setting Default Off Level Specifies how saturated colors are in dark areas This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 119 Default 0 Knee Controls the upper part of the gamma curve highlights of the image By compressing the highlights you can prevent parts of the image from being overexposed This is not available when Gamma is set to Cine 1 Cine 2 Canon Log or EOS Std Enable Activates deactivates the setting Default On Slope Determines t
59. card A 11 Approximate used space on SD card 6 Available recording time on CF card A 1 NOTES e Depending on the recording media the total space displayed on the screen may differ from the nominal capacity listed on the CF card or SD card AK 2K MXF 1 2 Status Screen camera mode 4K and 2K modes only AK 2K MXF 1 2 1 8 3G SDI Output On 2 S lo ae eae Tat On 3 i LL Of BT 709 maa Resolution 1970x1080 5 4 Sean Mode F _ 6 Peaking Gain i 7 1 8G SDI terminal output status LZ 41 5 MON terminal resizing method LL 147 2 MON terminal output status LZ 147 6 MON terminal scan mode LL 147 3 MON terminal LUT output LL 148 7 MON 1 terminal peaking gain LL 80 4 MON terminal output resolution LL 147 182 Displaying the Status Screens 4K 2K MXF 2 2 camera mode Video vma mode Status Screen 1 4K 2K MXF 2 2 HDMI Status HDMI 2 5 HD SD SDI Output HD 1920x1080i 2CH PCM Scan Mode P 3 EXT Telle Output Composite Scan Mode P 4 HD SD Output Mir Onscreen HD On SD Off Resize SD Output S q U 2 ee D 6 Bit Rate Resolution 50 Mbps 1920x1080 Frame Rate 23 98P 7 Resize MXF Output HDMI OUT terminal status 2 HD SD SDI terminal output status and scan mode LL 149 3 SYNC OUT terminal output status and scan mode Q 150 Appears in CAMERA mode only CONDOS Metadata 1 2 Status Screen cavea mode only Metadata 1 2 O
60. changes to green START Tally lamp 2 Open the System Priority submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 93 System Priority amp START STOP Access indicators 91 Recording Video 3 Select 4K 2K or MXF and then press SET e The system priority changes to the selected menu item Hereafter 5K 4K 2K MXF Setup each mode will be referred to in this manual as 4K mode 2K 52 mode and MXF mode respectively System Priority e Select AK or 2K to record a 4K or 2K clip on an external recorder Select MXF to record only an MXF clip HD video on a CF card 4K e During 4K mode RAW appears on the upper right of the screen and the CNM icon appears on the rear panel Olip refers to one movie unit from the point you press the START STOP button to start recording until you press again to pause the recording You can also include custom picture settings LL 114 and metadata Q 97 with MXF clips 4 Press the START STOP button to begin recording a e During 4K and 2K modes Recording starts and a signal is sent to an external recorder e During MXF mode START connected to the HD SD SDI or 3G SDI terminals instructing it to start recording REC gt appears at the upper center of the screen and the tally lamp illuminates If there is a CF card in a CF card slot the camera simultaneously records an MXF clip on the card In such case REC appears on
61. device using the 3G SDI terminals in 4K and 2K modes or HD SD SDI terminal in MXF mode if you start or stop recording with the camera the other device will also start or stop recording Recording Video e By default f Other Functions Fan is set to Automatic and the internal cooling fan will be activated during record pause mode While recording when the camera s internal temperature goes below a predetermined level the cooling fan will deactivate You can also set the cooling fan to be activated at all times O4 e When recording MXF clips the following apply You can use f Other Functions 3 Rec Review QA 104 to review part or all of the last clip recorded If you set an assignable button to Add IN Mark or Add Mark LL 111 you can press the button to add an N mark or M mark to the last clip recorded You can use f Other Functions 9 Delete Last Clip QA 175 to delete the last clip recorded However you cannot delete the last clip if double slot recording is on Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations Q 50 you can start and stop recording from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 Press LIVE VIEW ON OFF to show the camera s live view image on the Wi Fi Remote screen 2 Press START STOP to begin recording e The recording operation indicator changes from STBY to 8 REC the center of the START STOP button lights up in red a
62. external monitor 1151 Selecting the Resizing Method for SD Video When HD video with a 16 9 aspect ratio is converted and output from the HD SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal as SD CAMERA mode 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup video with a 4 3 aspect ratio you can choose how it appears on the MEUS mode external monitor z Video Setup Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF HD SD Output 1 Open the Resize SD Output submenu Resize SD Output 4K AK 2K MXF Setup in camera mode or E Video Setup in _mevia mode 3 HD SD Output 3 Resize SD Output 2 Select the desired option and then press SET Squeeze Options Letterbox The picture is reduced in size while maintaining the aspect ratio and black letterbox bars are added to the top and bottom of the image so that the picture has a 4 3 aspect ratio Squeeze The image is squeezed from the left and right so that the entire image fits within the screen The image will appear normal if the external monitor also has a 16 9 aspect ratio Side Crop The left and right sides of the image are cropped so that the central part of the image fits within the screen Original image 16 9 Letterbox setting Squeeze setting Superimposing Onscreen Displays to Appear on an External Monitor You can choose to superimpose onscreen displays on the video output from the HD SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal
63. identification plate is located on the bottom The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an AN ATON AN equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to TT the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of CAUTION sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC E cise on SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO T intended to alert the user to the presence of important 3 QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL operating and maintenance servicing instructions in _ the literature accompanying the product Only for European Union and EEA Norway Iceland and Liechtenstein These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household K ae waste according to the WEEE Directive 2012 19 EU the Battery Directive 2006 66 EC and or national legislation implementing those Directives EL If chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above in accordance with the Battery Directive this indicates that a heavy metal Hg Mercury Cd Cadmium Pb Lead is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive This product should be handed over to a designated collection point e g on an authorized one for one bas
64. input external microphone or external line input if the audio level is set to automatic you can use the J Audio Setup 3 Audio Input 3 XLR ALC Link setting to link the audio level adjustment of both channels CH1 CH2 switches CH1 CH2 You can set the audio level for each channel manually from OO to 18 dB switches Manual Audio Level Adjustment 1 Set the switch of the desired channel to M 2 Turn the corresponding dial to adjust the audio level e For reference the O corresponds to OO 5 corresponds to O dB and 10 corresponds to 18 dB e As a guideline adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level meter on the screen or rear panel will go to the right of the 18 dB mark one mark right of the 20 dB mark only occasionally e Closing the protective cover for XLR audio controls will prevent the audio controls from being changed inadvertently 1 NOTES e f at least one of the channels is set to manual audio level adjustment you can also activate the audio peak limiter to prevent audio distortions When activated the audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of audio input signals when they exceed 4 dBFS Use the J Audio Setup 9 Audio Input 3 Limiter setting e We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level If the input level is too high audio may become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level e f you set an assignable butto
65. into the GRIP terminal may not be correctly connected Make sure the plug is firmly inserted all the way into the GRIP terminal When the Ge switch is set to all buttons except for the START STOP button are locked and cannot be operated Set the EMAJ switch to CAMERA If the f Other Functions 3 Custom Function 6 START STOP setting is on the START STOP button will also be locked Pressing the START STOP button will not start recording Set AK 2K MXF Setup 9 3GI SDI Output to On to enable output from the 3G SDI or MON terminals Set AK 2K MXF Setup amp Rec Command to On to enable the external recorder to be operated using the camera s START STOP button The camera is in lens exchange mode Press the LENS EXCHANGE button to exit the mode The point where the START STOP button was pressed does not match the beginning end of the recording There is a slight interval between pressing the START STOP button and the actual start end of recording This is not a malfunction The camera will not focus The viewfinder is not adjusted Use the dioptric adjustment dial to make the proper adjustment QJ 36 The lens is dirty Clean the lens with a soft lens cleaning cloth When a subject flits across in front of the lens the image appears slightly bent This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors When a subject crosses very quickly in front of the camera the image may seem slightly warped This i
66. level of correction will be lower for lenses that cannot provide distance information The level of correction will be lower the higher the ISO speed gain setting used No correction will be applied when correction data is not available for the lens attached When using EF S lenses peripheral illumination fall off may be more pronounced Periph Illum Corr Off Preparing the Camera When using non Canon lenses peripheral illumination will not be corrected Even if the M Camera Setup gt Periph Illum Corr setting is available not grayed out it is recommended to set it to Off Attaching a PL Lens 1 Hold a bayonet ring handle and turn the bayonet ring counter clockwise to remove the body cap and remove any dust caps from the lens 2 Attach the lens to the camera aligning a groove on the lens with the PL lens index pin on the mount 3 Turn the bayonet ring clockwise to fix the lens in place els Removing a PL Lens 1 Turn the bayonet ring handles counter clockwise 2 Remove the lens and replace the body cap to the camera and the dust cap to the lens Attaching and Removing the Monitor Unit You can attach the monitor unit to the accessory shoe on the camera or that on the handle unit Further ahead you will find details about using the LCD panel and adjusting the LCD screen LL 37 Attaching the Monitor Unit 1 Set the switch to OFF 2 Insert the attachment base of the monitor unit to the
67. many of the camera s functions can be adjusted from the menu for general settings which opens after pressing the MENU button You can also register frequently used menu settings in a customized submenu My Menu for easy access In MEDIA mode press the MENU button to open the menu for general 29 settings or SET to open the clip menu for clip operations For details about the available menu options and n settings refer to Menu Options LL 167 CANCEL button SET button SELECT dial ss wea Oe LJ MENU Joystick Push the joystick to move the orange selection frame in the menu Then press the joystick itself or the SET button at the center of the SELECT dial to select the menu item indicated by the orange selection frame CANCEL button Press to return to the previous menu or to stop some operations that are in progress CANCEL button MENU button MENU button Press to open the menu and then press again to close the menu after adjusting desired settings SET button Note that while only the joystick on the monitor unit is labeled as SET each joystick will function as the SET button when pressed down SELECT dial Turn the dial to move the orange selection frame up or down in the menu Selecting an Option from the Menu The following is a step by step explanation of how to select an option from the menu In the procedures throughout the rest of this manual opening and closing the menu is ass
68. mark will be added to the clip e Adding a clip mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback Adding an M Mark or M Mark from the Index Screen 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Add fi Mark or Add M Mark and then press SET e he clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 3 Select OK and then press SET e The screen changes back to the clip index screen and an fll mark or M appears next to the selected clip s thumbnail e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation 1 NOTES e A clip cannot have both an N mark and M mark at the same time When you add a M mark to a clip with an M mark the M mark will be deleted Similarly when you add an N mark to a clip with a M mark the mark will be deleted Deleting M Marks or M Marks Deleting an M Mark or M Mark from a Clip 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Delete IR Mark or Delete M Mark and then press SET e he clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 3 Select OK and then press SET e The screen changes back to the clip index screen the selected mark is deleted e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation MXF Clip Operations Deleting M Marks from All Clips 1 Open the Delete All fJ Marks submenu Other Functions Other Functions Delete All JR Marks 2 Select OK and then press SET
69. metadata to MXF clips which are recorded on a CF card You can use the Canon XF Utility software to check and search for specific metadata You can also create and transfer a user memo remotely using the Wi Fi Remote application LL 50 97 Metadata Components Entering content Checking content Metadata EE Camera Canon XF Utility Wi Fi Remote Canon XF Utility User Memo clip title creator location and description o o GPS information altitude latitude and longitude e o o Recording data Shutter speed ISO speed gain value etc 8 e Unique Material Identifiers UMID country organization o E 7 E and user codes based on the SMPTE standard LL 170 User memo files need to be created using the software and saved on the SD card in advance Can only be added to clips already recorded Recording data is logged automatically by the camera Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF Utility Before you can add a user memo you must first install the Canon XF Utility software L 155 Next create the user memo and then save it to an SD card Once you insert the SD card in the camera and select the user memo it will be added to clips you record For details on using the software refer to the instruction manual that is installed with the Canon XF Utility software LL 157 1 Use Canon XF Utility to save a user memo to an SD card e For details
70. not appear in the indicator e Pre recording is available only during MXF mode Recording Video Rear Panel Displays You can check the following information on the rear panel This allows you to easily adjust main camera functions like the shutter speed white balance and ISO speed gain even when the monitor unit is not attached to the camera without having to use the viewfinder 56 Y 8 9 NDF EXT LOCK HO 3 1 nn nnm nnm nn Li LI LOL e DA A Ley CH1 HnnmnmmnmnmimmmminmII mnAImmnmng dB 40 30 20 10 0 CH2 HnmnmmnmmnmmmmmmmE I n nmn J 1 White balance Q 76 8 Aperture value 1 74 2 Timecode settings NDF Non drop frame Q1 85 9 ND filter LL 73 EXT LOCK External time code signal locked 10 RAW output LL 60 LL 89 HOLD Time code display on hold Q 85 11 Approximate remaining battery time 3 Time code QQ 84 12 Wi Fi QQ 50 4 Audio level meter QQ 94 95 13 CF card status and available recording time 5 White balance fine tuning LL 77 6 258 ISO speed 5B Gain LL 70 Shutter speed LZ 67 White balance 9G Shutter speed mode set to Speed Slow or Off iBOU Shutter speed mode set to Angle 59944 Shutter speed mode set to Clear Scan 0 White balance fine tuning QA 77 55089 White balance color temperature QA 77 1 Displayed also in wa mode n these shutter speed modes only the denominator is displayed GG indicates a shutter speed of 1 100 etc 3 Onl
71. or push the joystick left right to switch to the previous next photo e Press the DISP button to hide show the onscreen displays e Press the If button to return to the Photos index screen imeortant Photo Playback 161 CAMERA Ze m MEDIA INDEX 10 11 12 lt lt n e Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera Do not remove the SD card i NOTES e The following photos may not be displayed correctly Photos not recorded with this camera Photos created or edited on a computer Photos whose file names have been changed 162 Photo Operations Photo Operations You can use the photo menu to delete a photo protect or unprotect a photo or copy a custom picture file embedded in a photo You can display the photo menu from the Photos index screen or photo playback screen Using the Photo Menu 1 From the Photos index screen select a photo and then press SET e f you are viewing a photo simply press SET e The photo menu appears Available functions depend on the photos settings 2 Select the desired function and then press SET Deleting Photos You can delete a photo you no longer need When you do so however the custom picture file embedded in it will also be deleted Photos can be deleted one at a time from the
72. previous waveform Type 2 This mode displays the edge monitor with the waveform monitor in Line Spot mode The waveform monitor appears on the left in green while the edge monitor appears on the right in blue The waveform of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the edge monitor waveform 102 Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips When recording on a CF card you can flag an important shot in a clip by adding a shot mark Bl There are two types of shot marks shot mark 1 El and shot mark 2 M and you can add either or both types to a single clip You can also add an OK mark M or check mark M to the entire clip to flag clips you want to set apart You can add all four types of marks remotely using the Wi Fi Remote application When the camera is in MEDIA mode you can add or delete shot marks QA 138 You can also display an index screen of all the shot marks LL 137 allowing you to find a particular scene in a clip more quickly Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF Adding Shot Marks while Recording To add a shot mark to a clip while recording you must first set in advance an assignable button to Add Shot Mark 1 or Add Shot Mark 2 1 Set an assignable button to Add Shot Mark 1 or Add Shot Mark 2 1 111 e o add both shot marks set one assignable button to Add Shot Mark 1 and another assignable button to Add Shot
73. recording basics Before you use an external recorder make sure it is operating correctly Before you begin recording on a CF card make a test recording first to check if the camera is operating correctly Record for approximately 6 minutes at 50 Mbps LL 60 Should the camera fail to operate correctly refer to 7roubleshooting LL 185 For details on recording audio refer to Recording Audio LL 92 Operating modes CAMERA ak JL 2K MxF Preparing to Record 1 Attach the monitor unit handle unit etc as necessary to build the desired configuration LL 32 2 Attach a charged battery pack to the camera LL 24 3 For MXF recordings insert a CF card into a CF card slot LT 43 e Insert another CF card into the other CF card slot to use relay recording LL 46 or double slot recording LZ 47 4 Attach a lens 1 33 35 5 To make 4K and 2K recordings connect the camera to an external recorder LL 41 6 Adjust the viewfinder 1 NOTES e The camera can add a user memo 4 97 to an MXF clip as you record It can be used to store information such as the clip name camera operator and filming location However you must set the user memo before recording Recording 1 Set the switch to CAMERA M 26 e The camera turns on in camera mode and enters record pause mode e When a CF card is in the camera the access indicator for the CF card slot selected for recording illuminates in red and then
74. recording mode settings 4096x2160 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 2K 2048 1920 Resolution 2048x1080 Selecting the Frame Rate This procedure is not necessary for 24 00 Hz recordings because the K 4K 2K MXF Setup frame rate will automatically be set to 24 00P 1 Open the Frame Rate submenu a oo 129 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 3 4K 4096 3840 or 2K 2048 1920 3 Frame Rate F Rat 2 Select the desired frame rate and then press SET Frame Rate e The available frame rates depend on the system priority system frequency recording mode and resolution settings 23 98 or 25 00P Gi NOTES Depending on the country region l of purchase e Onscreen displays representing the mode resolution and frame rate that you selected will appear on the upper right of the screen e For details on the signal output from the 3G SDI terminals refer to Connecting to a 4K or 2K Compatible External Recorder LL 41 For details on the signal output from the other terminals refer to Video Output Configuration LL 141 Available system frequency system priority recording mode resolution and frame rate settings System frequency 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz 24 00 Hz System priority Frame rate 1 Mode Resolution 1 23 98P 29 97P 59 94P 25 00P 50 00P 24 00P RAW 4096x2160 o o e e e o HRAW 4096x1080 o 4K 4K1K RAW 4096x1080 o e B RAW 3840x2160 o o o e e o HRAW 3840x1080 o e
75. set to Slow bright red green or blue dots may appear on the screen In such case use a faster shutter speed or select a lower ISO speed or gain value LZ 70 e Even when using the C9 EOS Std preset custom picture file if you set the camera to a certain shutter speed you may not get the exactly the same image brightness as you would on an EOS digital SLR camera set to the same shutter speed e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can change the shutter mode with the remote controllers SHUTTER SELECT button 7Q ISO Speed Gain ISO Speed Gain Depending on the shooting conditions you may want to adjust the brightness of the image You can do so by changing the ISO speed or gain value to adjust the sensitivity of the sensor Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Available ISO speed and gain settings Increment Normal range Extended range 1 stop increments 3202 400 800 lt 850 gt 1600 3200 6400 12800 200002 25600 51200 80000 320 400 500 640 800 850 1000 1250 1600 2000 ISO S eed J J J J J J J J J J 1 3 stop increments 2500 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12800 16000 POU URDU Ut 64000 80000 20000 6 dB 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 18 dB an Normal 21 dB 24 dB 27 dB 30 dB 33 dB 36 dB 39 dB 42 dB Fine 0 dB to 24 dB in 0 5 dB increments 1 Settings available only when WI Camera Setup 3 ISO G
76. subsidiaries in the United States and or other countries e Wi Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi Fi Alliance e AJA KONA 3G SDI are trademarks of AJA Video Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders NVIDIA CUDA GeForce and Quadro are trademarks and or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the U S and other countries HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e Other names and products not mentioned above may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies e his device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft e ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 Highlights of the EOS C500 C500 PL The Canon Digital Cinema Camera EOS C500 C500 PL has been designed with the discerning professional in mind It is truly a cinematographer s camera The following are just some of the many features that will help turn your creative vision into reality 4K Recording System with Cinema Quality Advanced 4K compatible Super 35mm CMOS s
77. the Photos index screen These screens appear only after a custom picture file has been selected These screens appear only when the optional WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter is attached to the camera and an active access point has been activated with the fv Other Functions 9 Wi Fi Remote setting Displaying the Status Screens Gamma Color Space Status Screen cavers mode only Gamma Color Space 1 15 Output Gamma Color Space Canon Log BI 709 1 19 MON 1 Canon Log BT 709 3 EE Canon Log BT 709 4 Sa es Normal 1 D mde e Normal 1 G mU Normal 1 7 ru Normal 1 1 S3G SDI terminal LL 144 5 SYNC OUT terminal LL 58 117 2 MON 1 terminal LZ 144 148 6 HDMI OUT terminal CF card recording 3 MON 2 terminal QQ 144 148 QO 58 117 4 HD SD SDI terminal LL 58 117 148 LCD screen viewfinder LL 58 117 When using Canon Log gamma and LA LCD VF Setup 99 View Assist is set to On Wide DR will be displayed in the Gamma column Camera Status Screen wi mode only Camera 1 LENS Increment 1 3 stop 2 i 1 3 stop 3 po Shutter Increment 1 4 stop 4 AE Illum Corr Status Off 5 1 ISO speed Gain increment LL 70 4 UU Correction for peripheral illumination 2 iW Iris increment LL 74 LL 34 3 Shutter speed increment A 68 5 Lens model name info JA 32 180 Displaying the Status Screens Assign Button 1 2 Assign Button 2 2 Status Screen Assign
78. the slot if it is not correctly oriented may damage the recording media or the camera Do not attach any labels or stickers on the recording media avoid the accidental erasure of the card s content To write protect the SD card SD cards SD cards have a physical switch to prevent writing on the card so as to gt set the switch to the LOCK position l o LOCK switch Disposal When you delete data on the recording media only the file allocation table is altered and stored data is not physically erased Take the necessary precautions when you dispose of the recording media for example by physically damaging it to prevent the leakage of private data If giving the recording media to another person initialize it using the Complete initialization option for SD cards LL 45 Fill it up with unimportant recordings and then initialize it again This makes recovering the original recordings very difficult Built in Rechargeable Lithium Battery The camera has a built in rechargeable lithium battery to keep the date time and other settings The built in lithium battery is recharged while you use the camera however it will discharge completely if you do not use the camera for about 3 months To recharge the built in lithium battery Connect the compact power adapter to the camera and use a household power outlet to power the camera for 24 hours while it is turned off Maintenance Others Maintenance Others Cleaning
79. the time code signal will not be output from the MON terminals TIME CODE terminal or HD SD SDI terminal During 4K and 2K modes the time code signal will be output from the 3G SDI terminals Slow amp fast motion mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off It will be deactivated also if you change the video configuration When the bit rate in the 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 MXF 3 Bit Rate Resolution setting is set to 50 Mbps 1920x1080 or 50 Mbps 1280x720 relay recording is not available during slow motion recording During 4K and 2K modes the running mode of the time code LJ 84 is set to Free Run and cannot be changed During MXF mode the running mode is set to Regen The time code advances while video is recorded If the running mode of the time code is set to Free Run or the time code is input from an external source the running mode will switch to Rec Run during special recording mode When special recording mode is deactivated the running mode will return to its previous setting 110 Special Recording Modes Pre recording Mode 3K AK 2K MXF Setup When pre recording mode is activated the camera starts recording continuously into a temporary memory of approximately 3 seconds so when you press the START STOP button the clip will contain also approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before you pressed the button Off Special Rec Operating modes
80. think you might need 23 24 Preparing the Power Supply Attaching the Battery Pack Ia d 1 Set the switch to OFF aie 2 Slide the BATT OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open j OFF MEDIA the battery compartment cover 3 Insert the battery pack all the way into the compartment as shown in the illustration and press it gently toward the left until it clicks 4 Close the battery compartment cover Removing the Battery Pack 1 Set the switch to OFF CAMERA 2 Slide the BATT OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open O OFF the battery compartment cover Q MEDIA 3 Holding down the RELEASE latch slide the battery pack toward the right and then pull it out 4 Close the battery compartment cover Checking the Remaining Battery Charge When the camera is turned on you can check the remaining battery charge by looking at any recording playback screen or the Battery Hour Meter status screen LL 183 When the camera is turned off use one of the following methods to check the approximate remaining battery charge For batteries compatible with Intelligent System press the CHECK button An indicator will light for approximately 3 seconds and show the approximate remaining battery charge e O O O 0 25 x x o o 26 50 9618 4 8 x x ol 51 75 41S 08 A X ox ox ox 76 100 CHECK button Battery charge indicator Press the BATT INFO
81. to a 4K or 2K Compatible External Recorder Video signal output from the 3G SDI terminals The following summarizes the video signal output from the 3G SDI terminals for general shooting situations The figures in parentheses apply to 2K mode Video configuration A 60 Output signal System priority 3G SDI 1 3G SDI 2 Recording mode iL terminal terminal 59 94P 29 97P 29 97P 29 97P 29 97P 29 97p Eam 23 98P 23 98P 23 98P OK 10 bit 50 00P 25 00P 25 00P 25 00P 25 00P 25 00P 24 00P 24 00P 24 00P2 4K HRAW 59 94P 29 97PsF 59 94P 29 97PsF 59 942 AK 4K1K RAW OK 10 bit 50 00P 25 00PsF 50 00P 25 00PsF 50 00P Both 3G SDI 1 terminal and 3G SDI 2 terminal are required The output from each terminal differs by one frame The signals output from 3G SDI 1 terminal and 3G SDI 2 terminal are the same The following summarizes the video signal output from the 3G SDI terminals for slow amp fast motion mode Video configuration Output signal System priority System Frame rate 3G SDI 1 3G SDI 2 Recording mode frequency slow amp fast motion terminal terminal 59 94 Hz 1 to 30 1 to 30P2 1 to 30P2 pati iia 24 00 Hz 32 to 60 32 to 60P RE 12 bi 2 2 2 FEY 10 bit a 1 to 25 1 to 25P 1 to 25P 26 to 50 26 to 50P 59 94 Hz 1 to 60 1 to 60P2 1 to 60P2 AK HRAW 24 00 Hz 62 to 120 62 to 120P oid dud 1 to 50 1 to 50P2 1 to 50P2 2K uv 10 bit
82. used functions to assignable buttons Q 111 so that you can call up those functions with the press of a single button You can also register frequently used menu settings in an easy to access personal menu My Menu LL 30 Custom functions LL 123 and custom onscreen displays LL 124 give you even more freedom to control many aspects of the camera s operation During MXF mode with custom picture settings LZ 114 you can enjoy unparalleled image control to deliver the Iook you want by adjusting parameters such as gamma and sharpness The custom picture settings can be recorded onto an SD card which allows multiple C500 C500 PL cameras to use the same settings or embedded in the recording itself LL 116 136 164 Hemote operation via Wi Fi You can attach the optional WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camera and operate it remotely via Wi Fi using the Wi Fi Remote application LL 50 The Wi Fi Remote application lets you monitor the image through live view and remotely control the focus shutter speed ISO speed gain and other settings Other Features Special recording modes The special recording modes LL 105 give you more creative control over your recordings You can create a slow motion or fast motion effect in your recordings record a certain number of frames at a set interval ideal for nature shots and other subjects with little movement or record a certain number of frames every time you press a b
83. zone 8096 i Level marker Aspect guide 4 3 Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns ft e rt fF eS 1 NOTES e You can turn off all onscreen displays except for the onscreen markers Q 55 e f you set an assignable button to Markers QJ 111 you can press the button to turn the onscreen markers on and off e f you selected Side Crop for the 3 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 MON 1 amp 2 Resize Output setting while video is output from the MON 1 terminal The 1 85 1 aspect ratio marker will not be displayed f you select 9596 for Safety Zone Area the markers on the left and right side will not be displayed Displaying Zebra Patterns L2 LCD VF Setup The camera has a zebra pattern feature that shows black and white diagonal stripes over areas that are overexposed The zebra patterns will not affect your recordings There are two types of zebra patterns and you can display both simultaneously Zebra 1 lets you identify areas within a certain range 45 of a specified level while zebra 2 lets you identify areas that are over a specified level When you display both Zebra 1 simultaneously and they overlap only zebra 1 will be displayed in those areas Select under Zebra 1 Open the zebra pattern Select submenu LA LCD VF Setup 99 Select under Zebra 2 Select Zebra 1 Zebra 2 or Zebra 1 amp 2 and then press SET 3 Open the zebra level submenu LA L CD VF Setup 9
84. 0 Audio Output 131 MXF Clip Operations 132 Using the Clip Menu 132 Displaying Clip Information 133 Adding M Marks or M Marks 134 Deleting M Marks or MM Marks 134 Copying Clips 135 Deleting Clips 136 Deleting the User Memo 136 Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a Clip 136 Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks 137 Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single Clip 138 Adding Shot Marks 138 Deleting Shot Marks 139 Changing a Clip s Thumbnail 139 6 External Connections 141 Video Output Configuration 141 Video Configuration and Video Output Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes 141 Video Output Configuration for MXF Mode 143 selecting the Color Space 144 Connecting to an External Monitor 146 Connection Diagram 146 Using the MON 1 and MON 2 Terminals 147 Video Output Using ACESproxy10 for On set Color Grading 148 Using the HD SD SDI Terminal 149 Using the HDMI OUT Terminal 149 Using the SYNC OUT Terminal 150 Selecting the Resizing Method for SD Video 150 Superimposing Onscreen Displays to Appear on an External Monitor 151 Developing RAW Clips 152 System Requirements 152 Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development Windows 152 Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development Mac OS 153 Viewing the Software Instruction Manual 153 Saving MXF Clips to a Computer 155 Installing Canon XF Utility Windows 155 Installing Canon XF Utility Mac OS 156 Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals 157 7 Photos 159 T
85. 00P 59 94P 29 97P 29 97P 50 Mbps 1920x1080 Retu 12 bit 2048x1080 23 98P 35 Mbps 1920x1080 23 98P eph 10 bit 1920x1080 50 00P 25 Mbps 1440x1080 2K 25 00P 25 00P 24 00P 50 Mbps 1920x1080 24 00P 2048x1080 59 94P 50 Mbps 1280x720 59 94P user 10 bit 1920x1080 50 00P 35 Mbps 1280x720 50 00P HRAW only Selecting the Resizing Method When Converting to HD Video When converting 4K or 2K image data with a resolution of 4096x2160 4096x1080 or 2048x1080 to MXF video with a resolution of 1920x1080 you can select how it will be recorded on a CF card or output from the HD SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal only when HD Y is selected 1 Open the Resize MXF Output submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 Resize MXF Output 2 Select Letterbox Squeeze or Side Crop and then press SET e The options are the same as those listed for Se ecting the Resizing Method LL 147 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup Resize MXF Output Letterbox 63 64 Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate 1 NOTES e f you set an assignable button to Resize MXF Output LZ 111 you can press the button to switch the resizing method e During 4K and 2K modes the picture output from the 3G SDI terminals and the picture recorded on a CF card will differ in image quality due to differences in the signal processing algorithm e Because the camera uses a simple resize conversion process vertica
86. 080 25 00PsF 50 00P gt 1080 50 00i 1080 25 00 P PsF 576 50 00i 25 00P 1080 25 00 P PsF 24 00P 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 29 97PsF T men 59 94P MEC T 720 59 94P 480 59 94i AKIKRAW 3840x10808 7 50 00P pc 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 1080 29 97PsF 59 94P 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97 PPSF a 29 97P 1080 29 97 P PsF di 12 bit 2048x1080 23 98P 1080 23 98 P PsF 1080 23 98 P PsF 7 Tm 1920x1080 1080 25 00PsF m 10 bit 1080 50 00i 1080 25 00 P PsF 576 50 00i 25 00P 1080 25 00 P PsF 24 00P 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 29 97PsF Tm 200552058 59 94P nemo T 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 10 bit 1920x1080 7 50 00P nl 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 142 Video Output Configuration Video configuration HDMI OUT SYNC OUT for recording terminal 9 terminal 2E em Recording mode Resolution Frame rate HD SD HD SD priority 59 94P 29 97P 1080 59 941 480 59 94P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 23 98P N 4096x2160 3840x2160 50 00P 4K 1080 50 00i 576 50 00P 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 25 00P 24 00P 1080 60 00i 1080 60 00i B 4096x1080 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i HRAW 3840x1080 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 59 94P 29 97P 1080 59 941 480 59 94P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i Um 2048x1080 23 98P 1920x1080 50 00P 2K RGB444 1080 50 00i 576 50 00P 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 10 bit 25 00P 24 00P 10
87. 1 Open the Vectorscope submenu f Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Vectorscope Normal 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e f you do not need to change the gain you do not need to perform steps 3 and 4 3 Open the vectorscope Gain submenu f Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Gain under Vectorscopel 4 Select 1x or 5x and then press SET Options Spot The color signal of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the Normal mode waveform Normal Displays the vectorscope Configuring the Edge Monitor mE LL f Other Functions Using this video scope allows you to focus with more precision You can use the edge monitor along with the other focus assistance functions CQ 80 The edge monitor features 2 modes WFM LCD Operating modes CAMERA ak JL 2K MXF Edge Monitor 1 Open the Edge Monitor submenu f Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Edge Monitor 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e f you do not need to change the gain you do not need to perform steps 3 and 4 Type 1 3 Open the edge monitor Gain submenu f Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Gain under Edge Monitor 4 Select the desired gain value and then press SET Options Type 1 The waveform that represents the focus of the entire picture is displayed in green In addition the waveform of the area in the three red frames is displayed in red on top of the
88. 10min 1 Number of Frames Recorded System priority Frame rate Frames recorded 4K Any 2K 1 3 6 9 59 94i 29 97P 23 98P 24 00P 59 94P 50 00i 50 00P 25 00P 2 6 12 MXF 106 Special Recording Modes Activating Interval Recording Mode and Recording 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup 1 Open the Special Rec submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup amp Special Rec Special Rec 2 Select Interval Rec and then press SET e INT STBY during 4K and 2K modes or INT STBY during MXF Off mode appears at the top of the screen with INT flashing 3 Press the START STOP button to begin recording e The set number of frames are recorded automatically at the set interval e The tally lamp illuminates e INT changes to INT while recording frames 4 Press the START STOP button again to stop recording e All of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip e INT STBY during 4K and 2K modes or INT STBY during MXF mode appears at the top of the screen with INT flashing e The tally lamp goes out Gi NOTES e You can use only one special recording mode at a time e While recording you cannot change the interval or number of frames e Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip e Interval recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off It will be deactivated also if you change the video configu
89. 29 97P 23 98P 24 00P 59 94P 50 00i 50 00P 25 00P 2 6 12 Activating Frame Recording Mode and Recording 1 Open the Special Rec submenu 4K 2K MXF Setup 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 Special Rec 2 Select Frame Rec and then press SET e FRM STBY during 4K and 2K modes or FRM STBY during MXF mode appears at the top of the screen with FRM flashing 3 Press the START STOP button to begin recording e The set number of frames are recorded automatically e he tally lamp illuminates e FRM changes to FRM e Repeat until you finish recording Special Rec Off 4 Open the Special Rec submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 93 Special Rec 5 Select Off and then press SET e Frame recording mode ends and all of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip e STBY during 4K and 2K modes or STBY during MXF mode appears at the top of the screen e The tally lamp goes out 1 NOTES e You can use only one special recording mode at a time e While recording you cannot change the number of frames e Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip Frame recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off It will be deactivated also if you change the video configuration During this special recording mode the running mode of the time code L 84 can be set to Rec Run or Regen The time code adv
90. 5 60 45 30 22 5 15 11 25 Clear Scan 59 94 Hz to 250 27 Hz 29 97Hz to 250 27 Hz 23 98 Hz or 24 00 Hz to 250 27 Hz Slow 1 4 1 8 1 15 1 30 1 4 1 8 1 15 1 3 1 6 1 12 Shutter speed mode Frame rate 50 00 Hz recordings 50 00i 50 00P 25 00P Off 1 50 1 25 Speed 1 3 stop 1 50 1 60 1 80 1 100 1 125 1 160 1 200 1 250 1 320 1 25 1 30 1 40 1 50 1 60 1 80 1 100 1 125 1 160 increments 1 400 1 500 1 640 1 800 1 1000 1 1250 1 1600 1 200 1 250 1 320 1 400 1 500 1 640 1 800 1 1000 1 2000 1 1250 1 1600 1 2000 1 4 stop 1 50 1 60 1 75 1 90 1 100 1 120 1 150 1 180 1 210 1 25 1 29 1 33 1 40 1 50 1 60 1 75 1 90 1 100 1 120 increments 1 250 1 300 1 350 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 700 1 800 1 150 1 180 1 210 1 250 1 300 1 350 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 1000 1 1200 1 1400 1 1600 1 2000 1 700 1 800 1 1000 1 1200 1 1400 1 1600 1 2000 Angle 360 300 240 180 150 120 90 60 45 30 360 300 240 180 150 120 90 75 60 45 22 5 15 11 25 30 22 5 15 11 25 Clear Scan 50 00 Hz to 250 78 Hz 25 00 Hz to 250 78 Hz Slow 1 3 1 6 1 12 1 25 1 3 1 6 1 12 1 During slow amp fast motion recording mode available values will vary depending on the selected shooting frame rate In the Wi Fi Remote application all shutter speeds 1 3 stop and 1 4 stop increments will b
91. 80 60 00i e 1080 60 00i YCCA22 2048x1080 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 10 bit 1920x1080 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 7 8 9 The resolution will be set to 1920x1080 When Ee 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 4K 4096 3840 or 2K 2048 1920 amp Resolution is set to 4096x2160 4096x1080 or 2048x1080 you can select 2048x1080 or 1920x1080 for the output Q4 147 The camera can apply onscreen markers zebra patterns peaking and magnification to the MON 1 terminal output The camera can apply magnification to the MON 2 terminal output Depending on the signal you can switch between the P and PsF setting QJ 147 149 for output Set E Video Setup in menia mode or 4K 2K MXF Setup in cAMERA mode 3 HD SD SDI 3 Output to HD SD or Off You can display zebra patterns on an external monitor during HD output LL 83 Zebra patterns will not be output during SD output When the camera is connected via HDMI OUT terminal to an external monitor the video signal output from the HD SD SDI terminal will be the same as that from the HDMI OUT terminal When the resolution is 2048x1080 the scan mode is PsF When the resolution is 1920x1080 the scan mode is interlaced HRAW only Video output will automatically switch to HD or SD depending on the capability of the external monitor 10 Set E Video Setup in mepia mode or isc 4K
92. 8P 1080 23 98 P PsF 1920x1080 50 00i 1080 50 00i l 1080 50 00i 1080 50 00i 576 50 00i 25 00P 1080 25 00 P PsF Me 24 00P 1080 24 00 P PsF 1080 60 00i 1080 60 00i 59 94P 720 59 94P 29 97P 720 29 97P 720 59 94P 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 23 98P 720 23 98P 1280x720 50 00P 720 50 00P 720 50 00P 720 50 00P 576 50 00i 25 00P 720 25 00P 24 00P 720 24 00P 720 60 00P 720 60 00P You can use the 00 00 TC UB Setup 99 Time Code 3 24P TC Sync setting to select Normal or XF Legacy You can switch between the P and PsF setting for output Time Code Signal Output The time code will be output from the TIME CODE terminal as an SMPTE standard LTC timing signal The user bit will also be output Before connecting the device set 00 00 TC UB Setup amp Time Code 3 TC In Out to Out to change the TIME CODE terminal to output LL 89 The embedded time code will be output from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminal Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K J 2K MxF 1 NOTES e The user bit of the time code signal is output while the camera is recording in CAMERA mode or during playback of a clip recorded on a CF card in MEDIA mode For the HD SD SDI terminal when the frame rate is set to 23 98P and the 00 00 TC UB Setup 9 User Bit 3 Output Mode setting is set to Pulldown the user bit will be 2 3 pulldown data In other words when a 23 98P recording i
93. 99 0 o e Color 20 to 20 0 o e 38 Sharpness 1 to 4 2 o o Backlight Normal Bright e o LCD VF B amp W On Off e o 38 LCD VF Simul On Off o o 37 View Assist On Off o 58 Peaking On Off e Select Peaking 1 Peaking 2 e Peaking 1 Color White Red Yellow Blue o Gain Off 1 to 15 8 eo 80 Frequency 1 to 4 2 o Peaking 2 Color White Red Yellow Blue e z Gain Off 1 to 15 15 o o Frequency 1to 4 1 171 Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options CAMERA MEDIA I Zebra On Off e Select Zebra 1 Zebra 2 Zebra 1 amp 2 o i 172 Zebra 1 Level 70 5 75 5 80 5 85 5 e 7 83 I 90 2 596 95 5 Zebra 2 Level 70 75 80 85 90 9596 e B 100 Markers Enable On Off e Center White Gray Off o Horizontal White Gray Off o Grid White Gray Off o Safety Zone White Gray Off e 02 Safety Zone Area 8096 9096 92 5 95 e Aspect Marker White Gray Off o Aspect Ratio 4 3 13 9 14 9 1 66 1 1 75 1 e 7 1 85 1 2 35 1 Audio Level On Off e Custom Display 1 Custom Picture On Off Focal Length On Off ND Filter On Off Key Lock On
94. C V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can use the remote controller s up down left right SET buttons in the same way as the cameras joystick e You can check some of the current settings on the status screens Q 178 Using the Customized Submenu My Menu You can register up to 14 frequently used menu settings under the My Menu submenu for easy access Furthermore if you set an assignable button to My Menu LL 111 you can press the button to access your registered menu settings even faster and more easily Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Adding Menu Settings My Menu 1 Open the My Menu Register screen x My Menu Edit amp Register Edit e The menu will change to blue to indicate you are selecting menu settings to add to the My Menu submenu e Press the CANCEL button to cancel the operation and return to the regular menu Register 2 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to add and then press SET 3 Select OK and then press SET twice e The menu setting you registered will now appear under the My Menu submenu e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation Rearranging Menu Settings X My Menu 1 Open the My Menu Move screen xXx My Menu 93 Edit 39 Move Edit 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the setting you want to move and then press SET Move e An orange 4 icon will appear next to the setting you selected to
95. CEM 12 bit CAM 10 bit ZA 10 bit 60 Resolution 2048x1080 1920x1080 62 Frame Rate For 59 94 Hz recordings 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P For 50 00 Hz recordings 50 00P 25 00P For 24 00 Hz recordings the frame rate is set to 24 00P and cannot be changed 62 MXF Bit Rate Resolution 50 Mbps 1920x1080 50 Mbps 1280x720 35 Mbps 1920x1080 35 Mbps 1280x720 25 Mbps 1440x1080 64 Frame Rate gt 6 For 59 94 Hz recordings 59 941 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P For 50 00 Hz recordings 50 001 50 00P 25 00P For 24 00 Hz recordings the frame rate is set to 24 00P and cannot be changed 62 Resize MXF Output Letterbox Squeeze Side Crop 63 Special Rec Interval Rec Frame Rec Pre Rec Slow amp Fast Motion Off 105 Interval Rec Interval 1 sec to 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec 1 min to 10 min 105 Rec Frames During 4K or 2K mode or MXF mode when Frame Rate is set to 59 94i 29 97P 23 98P or 24 00P 1 3 6 9 During MXF mode when Frame Rate is set to 59 94P 50 001 50 00P or 25 00P 2 6 12 105 Frame Rec Rec Frames During 4K or 2K mode or MXF mode when Frame Rate is set to 59 94i 29 97P 23 98P or 24 00P 1 3 6 9 During MXF mode when Frame Rate is set to 59 94P 50 001 50 00P or
96. CUR TR b Cea Out 32 D DLL BO ra oh aie ton d Rr Seduta eee 74 Date and time REM de one Gb ge tree 2f ASDOSUTOLO acute e oo Si uen s 147 150 Date Ia TIO NC es Le ta aaa 175 Assignable buttons leues 111 DPIN tagiinSh lee n BB 25 Audio peak limiter 94 95 DCI gamma 2 A n n n n KK IR 148 Audio recording see ocn etes doe doe Dt po etes 92 WPS LN eee oe ee n amp n n n 144 Audio recording level n 94 95 Developing RAW clips 192 Audio reference signal 97 48 99 Direct settinggffi ode esee 66 Double slot recording ssl 4T B Drop frame time code lesse 85 Battery pack 0 050 MBB 23 Bitrate ee ee e AA 60 E Black balance 9 s 48 EJOS MONOD a dao cun mea oe RENE dr oes 101 Built in backup battery 8 405 194 BCS MOURNE oou dur e edo y wat eee og er 32 EXT 172 t mninials s ce dr REDE RR 35 C External recorder sib Vaca dedo a der E der edP os 41 ELE E ENEE T E E 144 EVO CUD a iis Rial Sos ih ei tele a esr aet da 36 Camera settings 0 0 0 cc eee eee 125 Canon Log gamma mio bea EE 58 F CF card Focus related functions raa 79 INSCHING eho M ee eee ea Ace 43 FIOI TIS ales oie En et E ad RE ERR RR 60 Recording method sees 46 Frame recording mode 0 05 106 Recovering data 6 6 eee eee d Free run time code 00 0 eee eee eee 84 REMOVING ME
97. Cinema Lens you cannot adjust the aperture using the camera Adjust the aperture using the lens e When using an EF lens that can correct the aperture value according to the position of the zoom you can use the PER Camera Setup 99 Iris Zoom lris Correct setting to activate this correction e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can adjust the aperture with the remote controller s IRIS dial By default turn the dial right to open up the aperture smaller F value and left to close the aperture larger F value ro 76 White Balance White Balance The camera uses an electronic white balance process to calibrate the picture and ensure accurate colors under different lighting conditions There are 3 methods of setting the white balance Custom white balance You can use a white object to establish the white balance and set it to one of two custom white balance positions M A or MB oet color temperature Allows you to set the color temperature between 2 000 K and 15 000 K Preset white balance Set the white balance to 9 daylight or amp incandescent lamp Preset white balance settings can be further fine tuned within a range of 9 to 9 When recording under fluorescent lights we recommend setting the custom white balance Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF 1 NOTES e When recording on a CF card the Color Matrix and White Balance custom picture settings LL
98. F card slot status Red Accessing CF card Recording playback is possible and the CF card slot is Green selected for recording playback A CF card is not inserted the CF card slot is not currently Indicator off selected or the CF card is not being accessed Removing a CF card 1 Wait until the access indicator for the card slot with the CF card to be removed is off 2 Slide the CF card slot cover switch in the direction of the arrow e The CF card slot cover will open upward slot A or downward slot B 3 Push the CF card release button e The release button partially pops out 4 Push in the CF card release button to release the CF card 5 Pull the CF card all the way out and close the CF card slot cover imeortant e Observe the following precautions while the CF or CFE access indicator is illuminated in red Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed i NOTES e f you set the f Other Functions 39 Media Access LED function to Off the access indicators will not illuminate Inserting and Removing an SD Card 1 Turn off the camera 2 Open the SD card slot cover 3 Insert the SD card all the way into the SD card slot until it clicks e The SD card slot is positioned at an angle Align the SD card straight in relation to the SD card slot with the label facing the lens 4 Cl
99. IR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON CANADA SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCTS OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from province to province CANON CANADA INC DIEQ441001 Canon Canon Inc CANON Europa N V 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan Bovenkerkerweg 59 1185 XB Amstelveen The Netherlands http www canon europe com ASIA and HONG KONG S A R Canon Hongkong Company Ltd 19 F The Metropolis Tower 10 Metropolis Drive Hunghom Kowloon Hong Kong 852 3191 2333 f 852 2428 3963 AUSTRALIA http www canon com au Canon Australia Pty Ltd 13 13 83 within Australia only 61 02 9805 2555 CANADA http www canon ca pro CANON CANADA INC Professional Product Support Soutien des produits professionnels 800 667 2666 CENTRO Y SURAM RICA http www cla canon com CANON LATIN AMERICA INC M XICO http Www canon com mx CANON MEXICANA S DE RL DE CV 52 55 5249 4905 NEW ZEALAND http www canon co nz Canon New Zealand Ltd 0800 222 666 within New Zealand only
100. K 2K MXF Setup 1 Open the Frame Rate submenu to set the frame rate 4 AK 2K MXF Setup 3 MXF 93 Frame Rate MXF 2 Select the desired option and then press SET Frame Rate e he selected frame rate will appear on the upper right of the screen 23 98P or 25 00P 1 NOTES LE e A single CF card cannot be used to record clips with different system r frequencies 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz 24 00 Hz epenaing on the country region of purchase Available bit rate resolution and frame rate settings System frequency gt 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz 24 00 Hz Bit rate Frame rate 1 Resolution 1 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P 50 00i 50 00P 25 00P 24 00P 50 Mbps 1920x1080 e E o o o o CBR 4 2 2 1280x720 e e e o o e 35 Mbps 1920x1080 e o o o z o VBR 4 2 0 1280x720 o o o o o rece 1440x1080 e a e e e E e E The first line indicates the bit rate in Mbps the second line indicates in parentheses whether the bit rate is constant CBR or variable VBR and the color sampling The recordings have 8 bit bit depth 66 Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC Button Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC Button You can adjust three main camera functions shutter speed white balance and ISO speed gain using the FUNC button direct setting mode In direct setting mode you can change settings using the LCD screen viewfinder or using only the rea
101. MA MVP_CanonxXF64 avx Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder Library QuickTime XFMpeg2Dec component Instructions for the plugins Applications Canon Utilities lt desired plugin gt e For lt adesired plugin gt select Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro or Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals For details on using the software refer to the instruction manual PDF file of each module The instruction manuals are installed with the software The following procedures for computers running Windows apply to Windows 7 The procedures may be different for other versions For details see the Helo modules of the operating system Viewing the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual Windows 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Canon XF Utility gt Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual 2 Select the language of the instruction manual to view Mac OS 1 From Applications open Canon Utilities gt Canon XF Utility gt Manual 2 Open the folder of the language and double click the PDF file You can also view the instruction manual by starting the Canon XF Utility software and then selecting Help gt View Instruction Manual Viewing the Plugin Instructions Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Windows 1 From the Start menu select All Progr
102. MERA mode In addition to its function as a synchronization signal output terminal you 4K can use the SYNC OUT terminal also as a terminal for analog video signal E a output You can output an HD component video luminance signal or a down converted SD composite video signal Not available for 24 00 Hz recordings MEDIA mode f Video Setup Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA SYNC OUT Output 1 Open the Output submenu Output 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup in camera mode or EE Video Setup in menia Composite mode 3 SYNC OUT 3 Output 2 Select HD Y or Composite and then press SET e f you selected HD Y HD component video luminance signal no more settings are necessary If you selected Composite SD analog composite signal you can select the SD resizing method with the following procedure e f necessary adjust the scan mode with the 45 4K 2K MXF Setup in camera mode or zz Video Setup in MEDIA mode 3 SYNC OUT 3 Scan Mode setting You can adjust the scan mode only when 00 00 TC UB Setup 9 Time Code 3 24P TC Sync is set to Normal and the recording mode is set to RAW Xm 12 bit or 10 bit 1 NOTES e When you play back a clip on a monitor with a 4 3 aspect ratio the monitor will switch automatically to widescreen mode if it is compatible with the Video ID 1 or WSS system e f necessary you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the
103. Mark 2 2 While you are recording press the assignable button at the beginning of the shot you wish to mark e A message indicating the short mark will appear and the selected shot mark will be added to the current frame of the clip e You can press the button again to add another shot mark Up to 100 shot marks Bl and B marks combined can be added to a single clip Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations LL 50 you can set a shot mark Bl or Bl remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 While recording a clip press SHOT MARK1 on the Wi Fi Remote screen to set a shot mark 1 or SHOT MARK2 to set a shot mark 2 e Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and the shot mark will be applied to the clip 2 Press amp to close the message Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips 1 NOTES e There may be up to a 0 5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camera adds the shot mark When using the Wi Fi Remote application the delay may be longer depending on the conditions of the wireless signal 103 e When you are using interval recording or frame recording mode you cannot add shot marks to a clip e When a clip contains either shot mark M will appear next to the clip s thumbnail in the playback index screen Adding an fd Mark or M Mark to the Last Clip Recorded After recording an important
104. Metadata 93 Setting setting was changed e Metadata sent to the camera from Wi Fi Remote will not be added to relay clips recorded before the switch to the current CF card Color Bars Audio Reference Signal You can have the camera generate and record color bars and or a 1 KHz audio reference signal and output them from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals HD SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal SYNC OUT terminal and Q headphone terminal Outputs audio reference signal only Outputs color bars only Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Recording Color Bars You can choose between SMPTE standard definition color bars EBU color bars and ARIB multi format HDTV color bars 1 Open the color bars Type submenu PAR Camera Setup 9 Color Bars 939 Type 2 Select the type of color bars and then press SET 3 Open the Enable submenu to activate the color bars PAR Camera Setup 9 Color Bars 9 Enable 4 Select On and then press SET e The selected color bars appear on the screen and will be recorded when you press the START STOP button e Turning the camera off or changing the operating mode to MEDIA mode will deactivate the color bars e Alternatively if you set an assignable button to Color Bars LZ 111 you can press the button to activate the color bars Recording an Audio Reference Signal The camera can output a 1 kHz audio reference signal with the color bars 1 Open
105. NOTES e Filters can be reused by washing them in water or mild detergent Make sure filters are completely dry before attaching them to the camera e Contact a Canon Service Center to purchase replacement filters Cooling fan filter Condensation Moving the camera rapidly between hot and cold temperatures may cause condensation water droplets to form on its internal surfaces Stop using the camera if condensation is detected Continued use may damage the camera Condensation may form in the following cases e When the camera is moved quickly from cold to warm places e When the camera is left in a humid room e When a cold room is heated rapidly To avoid condensation e Do not expose the camera to sudden or extreme changes in temperature e Remove the recording media and battery pack Then place the camera in an airtight plastic bag and let it adjust gradually to temperature changes before removing it from the bag When condensation is detected The precise time required for water droplets to evaporate will vary depending on the location and weather conditions As a general rule wait for 2 hours before resuming use of the camera Maintenance Others Operating the ND Filter Manually In the rare case that the internal electronic motor that drives the ND filter malfunctions you can operate the ND filter manually as an emergency measure 1 Turn off the camera and remove the lens 2 Unscrew the screw in the illustration a
106. NTRE REP DN 44 owitching CF card slots 46 128 G Check marks MZ 0 00 eee 103 134 CINEMADIeSSt cusioHr DICITO arsaa 58 eE E EE ua oe AEE TE T 70 GENLOCK terminal ess 88 Gema Gamit ase se 2 shoes TT TE T T TT T T 144 Clips MXF H Adding an f mark M mark 103 134 Adding Deleting shot marks 1 02 138 Handie tnit P TT 39 COO WING cides aet ee Stee t ctus Bark a 135 HD SD SDI terminal ica ES RE Rts 149 Delen surrar i ed a elt aei de etes 136 HDMI OUT terminal rh E S op ee n 149 Displaying clip information 133 Headphone terminal 200e00 96 gc jer P 128 HOUPIMCIOR dubi ots decade bet i77 COO DIS I LEE 99 PIRAN ATTE 60 W only 208 I Index screens Changing clip thumbnail 139 i CIC 127 Expand CID ades x amp d oe 3e Ra 9 R3 Es 138 Shot markS ua neas xu ee EE ACE S 137 Initializing recording media 45 Interval recording mode 00055 105 gap TT 74 ISO speed sic ea esas deta ri renki y Rd ds 70 J joie CCP 29 Joystick guide 0 00 eee 130 K Key lock sui ax aphex oe a x dona enw deitactoure ossi a L Language N Bl 28 LCD screen ccc ee eA eee ah 38 LENS Lecce ee eno ii 32 Lens exchange mode lernen 34 LUT lookup table isses RM 148 M Magnification MP pe 80 Menu settingS 0 00 cee eee eee 167 Message list us aus 65 dole R089 6 HOw Re ee EE 188 Metadata ia
107. ON CINEMA EOS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U S A Inc Canon USA with respect to a the Canon Cinema EOS Product and b the accessories for the Canon Cinema EOS Product if any packaged with this limited warranty collectively the Products and purchased in the United States This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase The Products are warranted to the original end user purchaser when delivered in new condition in its original container under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows Parts At Canon USA s option defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase Labor For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase labor will be provided free of charge by Canon USA s factory service centers or designated service facilities located in the United States When returning Products under this warranty you must pre pay the shipping charges and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase with a complete explanation of the problem During the ONE YEAR warranty period repairs will be made and the Products will be return shipped to you free of charge For repairs after the warranty period is over you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and
108. OS Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X Mac OS Installing Canon XF Utility Windows The following procedures apply to computers running Windows 7 The procedures may be different for other versions For details see the Helo modules of the operating system 1 Double click the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site to decompress it e The file is xuw zip for Canon XF Utility or xpmw zip for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access e The rest of the explanation refers only to Canon XF Utility but the procedure is similar for the Canon XF plugins e The folder xuw will be created that contains the file xuw exe 2 Double click xuw exe 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to select your area continent country region and language e Available options will vary depending on your country region 4 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications exit other applications and then click OK e The softwares license agreement appears 5 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation e f you do not select Yes you cannot install the software e When the installation has completed Installation has completed successfully appears 6 Click Next and then click Finish Uninstalling Canon XF Utility Windows 1 From the Start menu select All Programs Canon Utilities Canon XF Utility Uninstall Canon XF Utility e A conf
109. PUB DIE 0441 001A Conon Digital Cinema Camera EOS C500 EOS C500 PL Instruction Manual Homi Important Usage Instructions WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO DRIPPING OR SPLASHING WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK AND TO REDUCE ANNOYING INTERFERENCE USE THE HECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ONLY COPYRIGHT WARNING Unauthorized recording of copyrighted materials may infringe on the rights of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws FCC NOTICE Digital Cinema Camera EOS C500 EOS C500 PL Systems This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired Operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and use in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no
110. S color space ODT Output Device Transform Refers to the table used for converting ACES color space information to the color information of the ideal display device RRT Reference Rendering Transform Refers to the table used for converting data from ACES color space to the color information of the ideal display device EET d Preparations Preparing the Power Supply You can power the camera using a battery pack or directly using the compact power adapter If you connect the compact power adapter to the camera while a battery pack is attached the camera will draw power from the power outlet Charge battery packs before use For approximate charging times and recording playback times with a fully charged battery pack refer to Charging Times LL 199 and Recording and Playback Times LL 199 Using a Battery Pack You can power the camera using the supplied BP 955 or an optional BP 950G BP 970G or BP 975 Battery Pack The BP 955 and BP 975 are compatible with Intelligent System meaning that you can check the remaining battery time The optional BP 970G BP 975 Battery Pack was not originally designed for use with this camera Because of its size you will not be able to close the battery compartment cover when using one LL 193 Charging the Battery Pack Charge battery packs using the supplied CG 940 Battery Charger Before charging remove the terminal cover of the battery pack 1 Connect the power cord to the battery c
111. Setup 93 iris Iris Increment 2 Select 1 2 stop 1 3 stop or Fine and then press SET Iris Changing the Aperture Value Iris Increment Turn the control dial to adjust the aperture e The selected aperture value will appear on the lower left of the screen 1 3 stop e When WI Camera Setup 99 iris 9 Iris Increment is set to Fine the actual increments will be smaller than 1 3 stop but the onscreen display will show the closest 1 3 stop aperture value 1 NOTES e You can use the Y Other Functions 939 Custom Function 9 Control Dial Dir or Grip Dial Dir setting LL 123 to change the direction of the adjustment when you turn the control dial Adjusting the Aperture Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations Q 50 you can adjust the aperture value remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 Press the current aperture value on the Wi Fi Remote screen 2 Select the desired aperture value from the list e You may need to scroll up down to see all the available values e Alternatively you can press IRIS to open the aperture or IRIS to close the aperture in 1 8 stop increments Onscreen displays will show the closest 1 3 stop aperture value e The selected value will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the lens 1 NOTES e When using an EF lens with no lens contacts such as a Canon
112. T to move to the next digit e Change the rest of the digits in the same way e Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the user bit 5 Select Set and then press SET to close the screen 8 88 Synchronizing with an External Device Synchronizing with an External Device Using genlock synchronization you can synchronize this camera s video signal to that of an external video device Similarly using an external time code signal you can synchronize this camera s time code to the external signal Using the external time code signal with multiple cameras allows you to set up a multi camera recording You can also output the time code signal from this camera to achieve the same result If you output the time code while shooting from the 3G SDI terminals or HD SD SDI terminal to an editing device the editor can create video with the same time code The HD SD SDI terminal can also output the time code during playback Connecting an External Device When synchronizing the camera to an external signal input a reference video signal through the GENLOCK terminal or output the camera s signal as a reference signal for an external device through the SYNC OUT terminal When synchronizing a time code signal use the TIME CODE terminal Be sure to set the TIME CODE terminal to input or output in advance Connect the external device to the camera as shown in the following diagram For the reference video signal
113. TY INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THE PRODUCTS AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE GIVEN BY ANY PERSON FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS SHALL BIND CANON USA SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS S0 THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU CANON USA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SERVICE STORAGE CHARGES LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCTS HARD DRIVE OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED AND EVEN IF CANON USA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON USA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCTS SOLD BY CANON USA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON USA SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT
114. UT synchronizing signal output terminal LL 90 150 22 HDMI OUT terminal LL 149 23 GENLOCK terminal LL 88 24 TIME CODE terminal LL 89 91 25 HD SD SDI terminal LL 149 26 SD card access indicator LZ 44 27 Q headphone terminal JQ 96 28 DC IN terminal Q 25 29 SD card slot LL 44 30 3G SDI terminals 1 and 2 LL 41 31 MIC microphone terminal LZ 92 32 GRIP terminal This terminal is the same as the grip unit connection terminal on the C300 C300 PL or C100 camcorder 15 Names of Parts C500 PL C500 39 33 PL Lens mount 38 Bayonet ring handles 11 35 39 PL Lens index pin Q 35 40 Bayonet ring LZ 35 est EF Lens mount 33 Mount handle 14 33 34 EF Lens mount index Q 32 35 EF S Lens mount index LZ 32 36 EF Lens contacts LZ 32 37 START STOP button LZ 51 49 41 Viewfinder unit 42 Viewfinder unit LOCK RELEASE screw 1 195 43 x rear panel s backlight button LZ 57 44 FUNC main functions button QA 66 45 START STOP button LZ 51 46 Joystick Q 29 SET button LL 29 47 CANCEL button LL 29 48 MENU button 1 29 49 CF card slot covers for CF card slots A top and B bottom 50 CF card slots A top and B bottom LL 43 51 RELEASE battery release latch LL 24 52 Battery compartment 53 Viewfinder LL 36 38 54 Dioptric adjustment dial LL 36 Names of Parts 55 Rear panel LL 57 56 MON 3G SDI terminal co
115. YCC 4 2 2 10 bit Frame rate 59 94i 29 97P PsF 23 98P PsF 50 00i 25 00P PsF 24 00P PsF Color space BT 709 DCI P3 Cinema Gamut BT 2020 LUT BT 709 Wide DR DCI Embedded audio time code VITC LTC assistance displays magnification peaking zebra pattern onscreen markers ACESproxy10 output MON 2 terminal only 2 Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings Magnification is available for the output from both MON 1 and MON 2 terminals Other assistance displays are available for the output from the MON 1 terminal only HD SD SDI Terminal BNC jack output only 0 8 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced 1 485 Gbps HD SDI SMPTE 292 Video Resolution 1920x1080 1280x720 Frame rate 59 94i 29 97 P PsF 23 98 P PsF 50 00i 25 00 P PsF 24 00 P PsF 59 94P 50 00P Specifications SD SDI SMPTE 259M Video Resolution 640x480 768x576 Frame rate 59 94i 50 00 Embedded audio time code VITC LTC LUT BT 709 Wide DR 4 Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings 203 HDMI OUT Terminal HDMI connector output only SYNC OUT Terminal BNC jack output only 1 Vp p 75 Q Output signal HD component video luminance signal HD Y HD analog tri level signal Analog blackburst signal SD composite video MIC Terminal 3 5 mm stereo mini jack 72 dBV manual volume center full scale 18 dB 600 Microphone attenuator 20 dB Headphone Terminal
116. Z 120 8 Selective NH settings hue chroma area and Y level LZ 120 9 Low key saturation LZ 119 Displaying the Status Screens J Data 2 3 Status Screen camera mode only Data 2 3 Lvl Sel 0 Sharpness 184 0 Slope 0 0 Curve 0 0 Ofst Off Normal 1 0 G R 0 G B 1 Sharpness settings level horizontal detail 4 frequency horizontal vertical detail balance and limit Q 119 5 2 Sharpness settings select knee aperture gain 6 and slope LL 119 3 Level depend settings level slope and offset T LL 120 2 Data 3 3 Status Screen camera mode only 1 Data 3 3 13 15 0 HD Frq 0 HV Bal 0 Lim 0 Knee Apt Gain 0 Slope Ofst 0 Depth 0 0 B R B G Phase 0 0 0 Gain 0 0 Coring settings level offset curve and depth LL 119 Noise reduction LL 120 Color matrix settings select gain and phase LL 121 Color matrix settings LD 121 2 miis Bal RGain 0 GGain 0 BGain 0 Color Correction Off D EM Area A Setting PO 4 EET RN A Revision Lvl I Area B Setting PO Other Functions 5 6 White balance RGB gain LZ 121 D 2 Color correction LL 121 3 Area A settings phase chroma area and Y level 6 Q 121 4 Area A revision settings level and phase LL 121 8 N C 16 A 16 Y 16 0 P 0 C 16 A 16 Y 16 Area B Revision Lvl 0 P 0 Setup Level Lvl 0 Press ie Clip At 100 Off 9 Area B s
117. aching the Terminal Covers You can remove the plastic covers of the following terminals and SD card slot to access them more readily For information on removing the MON 3G SDI terminal cover refer to Connecting to a 4K or 2K Compatible AO External Recorder LL 41 _ 3 e EXT 1 and EXT 2 e DC IN e SYNC OUT e SD card slot e GENLOCK and TIME CODE e REMOTE and HDMI OUT e HD SD SDI e MIC e CH1 and CH2 e WET terminal XLR terminals on the monitor unit e GRIP terminal e headphones Removing the Terminal Covers Open the terminal cover and gently pull it straight out Attaching the Terminal Covers Insert the connecting strip into the opening to attach the terminal cover Gi NOTES e f the connecting strip is difficult to grasp use a pair of tweezers or similar tool Connecting to a 4K or 2K Compatible External Recorder Connecting to a 4K or 2K Compatible External Recorder When you use this camera to make 4K or 2K recordings you must connect the camera to an external recorder using the 3G SDI terminals In addition to a video signal the 3G SDI terminals output an audio signal time code signal metadata and clip name information Output from the 3G SDI terminal is enabled by default but if it has 41 been disabled you must enable it after you connect the camera to the external recorder Refer also to the external recorder s instruction manual for details on how to record To make 4K recordings the exte
118. ailable Custom Picture Settings The following are the available settings Even if no custom picture file is selected the default settings are still applied to the picture Gamma The gamma curve changes the overall look of the image Default Normal 1 Normal 1 to Normal 4 These settings are suitable for viewing the image on a TV monitor Highlights in Normal 2 are brighter than those of Normal 1 Dark tones in the lower part of the gamma curve for Normal 3 ITU R BT 709 standard and Normal 4 are more pronounced than those of Normal 2 Cine 1 or Cine 2 Use Cine 1 for a gamma curve that results in a picture with a cinema like feel and cinema like tones Cine 2 has softer contrasts than does Cine 1 but is also suitable for creating a cinema like picture Canon Log Applies a logarithmic gamma curve for outstanding dynamic range Requires image processing in post production 118 Custom Picture Settings EOS Std This gamma curve approximates the look of an EOS digital SLR camera when the picture style is set to Standard high contrast vibrant colors Gamma Canon log Cine 1 Qine2 Normal 2 3 4 D a Output Output Normal 1 Normal 4 Canon Log Normal 3 Normal 1 2 Input Input Black Controls the black level and color cast of blacks Master Pedestal The master pedestal increases or decreases the
119. ain 9 Extended Range is set to On The minimum and maximum ISO speeds are available even when the 1 stop increment scale is selected 3 ISO speed required for a suitable dynamic range for Canon Log gamma Equivalent to a gain value of 2 5 dB This value is only available when Extended Range is set to Off Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value 1 Open the ISO Speed Gain Select submenu PER Camera Setup 93 ISO Gain 9 Select PAR Camera Setup SO Gain 2 Select ISO or Gain and then press SET If you selected ISO the default value Select 3 Open the ISO Increment submenu to select the increment to ISO use when adjusting the ISO speed SO 98 Camera Setup 93 ISO Gain 99 ISO Increment 4 Select 1 stop or 1 3 stop and then press SET I Camera Setup 5 Adjust the ISO speed using the direct setting mode e Repeatedly press the FUNC button to highlight the ISO speed SO Gain display select the desired value and then press SET For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode LD 66 ISO Increment If you selected Gain 1 3 stop 3 Open the Gain submenu to select the increment to use when adjusting the gain PER Camera Setup ISO Gain 9 Gain 4 Select Normal 8 dB increment or Fine 0 5 dB increment and then press SET ISO Gain PAR Camera Setup 5 Adjust the gain using the direct setting mode e Repeatedly press the FUNC button to highlight the gain display Gain se
120. aking Photos 159 Taking Photos in CAMERA Mode 159 Capturing Photos in MEDIA Mode 159 Photo Playback 161 Displaying the Photos Index Screen 161 Viewing Photos 161 Photo Operations 162 Using the Photo Menu 162 Deleting Photos 162 Protecting Photos 163 Copying Custom Picture Files 164 Photo Numbering 165 8 Additional Information 167 Menu Options 167 Displaying the Status Screens 178 Troubleshooting 185 List of Messages 188 Handling Precautions 192 Maintenance Others 195 10 Optional Accessories 198 Specifications 201 Index 207 CO UNI SY Introduction 11 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the Canon EOS C500 C500 PL Please read this manual carefully before you use the camera and retain it for future reference Should the camera fail to operate correctly refer to roubleshooting CQ 185 Conventions Used in this Manual e IMPORTANT Precautions related to the camera s operation e 3 NOTES Additional topics that complement the basic operating procedures e T Reference page number SE Text that applies only to the model shown in the icon The following terms are used in this manual Screen refers to the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen CF card refers to a CompactFlash CF card SD card refers to an SD or SDHC memory card Recording media refers to CF cards and SD cards Photographs in the manual are simulated pictures taken with a still camera Some screenshots hav
121. amera Fe Transfer File 1 After selecting a file on the SD card to replace open the Load From ales Load From Cam Sd Transfer File Load From Cam ee ae 2 Select the file to transfer to the SD card and then press SET 3 Select OK and then press SET e The file on the SD card will be overwritten by the one on the camera When the confirmation screen appears press SET 4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu 1 NOTES e You can also copy a custom picture file embedded in an MXF clip to the camera LL 136 Embedding Custom Picture Settings in a Recording f Other Functions By default when you record an MXF clip or take a photo with custom picture settings applied to it the custom picture file used to record it is embedded in the image file Later those embedded settings in the MXF clip or photo can be copied to the camera LL 164 and be applied to future recordings You may find that embedding custom picture settings in To Clip On a recording helps you keep track of them such as verifying what settings To Photo On were used for a particular recording Add Sg File 1 Open the Add File submenu Other Functions 3 Add File 2 Select To Clip or To Photo and then press SET e Selecting To Clip will embed the custom picture file in a clip while selecting To Photo will embed the file in a photo 3 Select On or Off and then press SET Av
122. ams gt Canon Utilities gt Desired plugin gt Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual or Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual 2 Select the desired language Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro and Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X Mac OS 1 From Applications open Canon Utilities gt Desired plugin gt Manual 2 Open the folder of the language and double click the PDF file Saving MXF Clips to a Computer Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Mac OS 1 From Applications open Canon Utilities gt Desired plugin gt Manual 158 2 Open the folder of the language and double click the PDF file Eg Photos 159 Taking Photos You can take photos when the camera is in CAMERA mode or you can capture a photo from an MXF clip when the camera is in MEDIA mode Photos are saved onto the SD card In camer mode photo size is 1920x1080 or 1920x540 In MEDIA mode photo size depends on the resolution setting of the clip that the photo is captured from If the clip is 1920x1080 or 1440x1080 the photo size is 1920x1080 If the clip is 1280x720 the photo size is 1280x720 At this size the camera can save approximately 670 photos on a 1 GB SD card Also during 4K and 2K modes if 5s AK 2K MXF Setup 99 Resize MXF Output is set to Letterbox the picture angle will differ Only when eps 4K 2K MXF Setup
123. an opportunity to approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred If you approve repairs will be made and the Products will be returned to you at your risk and expense If you disapprove we will return ship the Products to you at no charge to you to an address within the United States This limited warranty only applies if the Products are used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software as to which items Canon USA will have no responsibility Canon USA shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the Products in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and or incompatible software Non Canon brand peripheral equipment and software which may be distributed with or factory loaded on the Products are sold AS IS without warranty of any kind by Canon USA including any implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose The sole warranty with respect to such non Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof Except for the battery pack packaged with the Products which carries a separate ninety 90 day limited warranty In order to obtain warranty service please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you purchased the Products or contact the CANON INFORMATION CENTER AT 855 CINE EOS 855 246 3367 or on the internet at pro usa canon com support You will be directed to the nearest service facility for your P
124. ance is changed Iris ISO Gain Off Control Dial ISO Gain Off Selects the function of the control dial Grip Ctrl Dial Iris ISO Gain Off Selects the function of the control dial on the grip unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 P IS0 Gain Off camcorder which can be attached to the GRIP terminal Control Dial Dir Reverse Normal Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the control dial Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the control dial on the grip Grip Ctrl Dial Dir Reverse Normal unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 camcorder which can be attached to the GRIP terminal SELECT Dial Dir Reverse Normal Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the SELECT dial Automatically switches the screen and output from the MON terminals to B amp W while the focus assist functions peaking and magnification are activated You can have the screen and output from the MON terminals switch to B amp W when only the peaking is activated when only the magnification is activated or when both are activated F Assist B amp W Both Magnify Peaking Off Magn Add Disp Peaking Edge Mon Off Displays peaking or the edge monitor when magnification is enabled When using another C500 or C500 PL camera to shoot 3D this function 3D Rec Mode On Off compensates for the video and audio signals output from the 3G SDI terminals and
125. ances by the number of frames recorded If the running mode of the time code LL 84 is set to Free Run or the time code is input from an external source the running mode will switch to Rec Run during special recording mode When special recording mode is deactivated the running mode will return to its previous setting During special recording mode the time code signal will not be output from the MON terminals TIME CODE terminal or HD SD SDI terminal During 4K and 2K modes the time code signal will be output from the 3G SDI terminals During MXF mode only 108 Special Recording Modes Slow amp Fast Motion Mode When you set the the frame rate to a progressive frame rate LL 60 the camera can record with a frame rate shooting frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate Recording a clip at a higher frame rate than the Frame Rate setting will result in a slow motion effect during playback up to 1 2 5 of the original speed Conversely a lower frame rate will result in a fast motion effect up to 60x the original speed Sound is not recorded in this mode During 4K and 2K modes MXF clips will not be recorded simultaneously on a CF card even if a card is inserted in the camera Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Configuring Slow amp Fast Motion Mode 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 1 Open the S amp F Frame Rate submenu 2k AK 2K MXF Setup gt S amp F Frame Rate S amp F Frame Rate 2 Select t
126. arpness applied to dark areas of the image Level Sets the brightness of the dark areas of the image that will be affected This setting can be adjusted from O to 50 Default O Slope Determines the slope of the area between the upper and lower parts of the gamma curve This setting can be adjusted from O to 3 with O having no slope 1 having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope Default O Offset Adjusts the sharpness level of dark areas in the image Setting higher values will lower the sharpness level This setting can be adjusted from O to 50 Default O Noise Reduction Reduces the amount of noise that appears in the image Select a level from 1 lowest level to 12 highest level or select Off to turn the noise reduction off Default Off Skin Detail The camera applies a softening filter to areas in the picture with skin tones to give a more pleasant appearance By changing these settings you can determine what areas will be detected as skin tones A zebra pattern will appear over areas on the screen that are detected as having skin tones Effect Level Adjusts the level of the filter The available options are Off Low Middle and High Default Off Hue Adjusts the hue for detection of skin tones This setting can be adjusted from 16 to 16 Default 0 Chroma Adjusts the color saturation for detection of skin tones This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 A
127. arranty card and your Bill of Sale as a permanent record of your purchase This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection modification or Product recall under applicable laws or regulations NO IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THE PRODUCTS AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE GIVEN BY ANY PERSON FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS SHALL BIND CANON CANADA SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU CANON CANADA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SERVICE STORAGE CHARGES LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCTS HARD DRIVE OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED AND EVEN IF CANON CANADA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON CANADA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCTS SOLD BY CANON CANADA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THE
128. ature O 40 C 32 104 F e Dimensions W x H x D 85 x 51 x 110 mm 3 3 x 2 0 x 4 3 in e Weight Approx 240 g 8 5 oz 205 BP 955 Battery Pack e Battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery compatible with Intelligent System e Rated Voltage 7 4V DC e Operating Temperature O 40 C 32 104 F e Battery Capacity Typical 5 200 mAh Minimum 37 Wh 4 900 mAh e Dimensions W x H x D 38 2 x 43 5 x 70 5 mm 1 5 x 1 7 x 2 8 in e Weight 220 g 7 8 oz Weight and dimensions are approximate Errors and omissions excepted The information in this manual is verified as of September 2014 Subject to change without notice Specifications 206 Index 207 2K mode mzimieut cr E ERR ENASN ee oe wee 60 Color Space e scuto n iub dod SEDE roh fet oO 144 SG 9Dl 1 2 terminals erore erroreari a das 41 CONMGEISETION dps auteni a p o Sanwa ales 196 MMOS MEN avi te eich te od A viet 60 Connection to an external monitor 146 Mel dioi MT EE eau aa ee ae 60 Connection to an external recorder 41 COGINGHAIN gresi ere diea este D Coepit d 59 A Custom displays sie este a Eos reos 124 ABB automatic black balance 48 GUSTO TURCTIONS s oras caer ee RD e SS 123 ACECSSONCS oat Hk inv bh trii ae aoe arid 198 CUSTON PICTUS 252 ted eee ened 114 2 E EE E E e 22 Custom picture settings IT ACESDIOKV TO ed ounce and coa nu AE SCREEN as 148 FAI MOINS e e tace noon Gon do RO
129. be liable for any damage to this product and or accidents such as fire etc caused by the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories e g a leakage and or explosion of a battery pack Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis Optional Accessories Battery Packs When you need extra battery packs select from the following BP 950G BP 955 BP 970G BP 975 When you use battery packs bearing the Intelligent System mark the camera 199 will communicate with the battery and display the remaining usage time accurate to 1 minute You can only use and charge these battery packs with cameras and chargers compatible with Intelligent System The optional BP 970G BP 975 Battery Pack were not originally designed for use with this camera Because of its size you will not be able to close the battery compartment cover when using one LL 193 Charging Times Use the supplied CG 940 Battery Charger to charge battery packs The charging times given in the following table are approximate and vary according to charging conditions and initial charge of the battery pack BP 950G BP 955 BP 970G BP 975 245 min 200 min 350 min 295 min Recording and Playback Times Recording and playback times given in the following tables are approximate and vary according to recording mode and charging
130. been stored 4 will flash slowly e During the procedure 4 will flash quickly When it stops flashing the procedure is completed and the setting will be applied on the camera p ae 1 NOTES Using the custom white balance setting Readjust the custom white balance if you turn the ND filter on off or when the light source has changed Very rarely and depending on the light source S4 may keep flashing it will change to a slow flashing You can still use the setting even in such case Adjusting the Focus Adjusting the Focus The camera does not have automatic focus control and focusing is done manually using the focus ring on the attached lens Nevertheless the camera offers focus assistance functions to help you adjust the focus more accurately 19 only You can adjust the focus of an attached EF lens remotely using the Wi Fi Remote application Operating modes CAMERA 4k 2K MxF Adjusting the Focus Manually Turn the focus ring on the attached lens to adjust the focus 1 If the attached lens is equipped with an automatic focus function set the lens to manual focus mode in advance e Refer to the instruction manual of the lens used 2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus Set the focus mode switch of the EF lens to MF in advance 1 NOTES e amp i On some EF lenses you can turn the focus ring to adjust the focus even when focus mode switch i
131. button to display the remaining battery charge for 5 seconds Depending on the battery life the battery information may not be displayed i NOTES e The first time you use a battery pack fully charge it and then use the Preparing the Power Supply BATT INFO camera until the battery pack is completely exhausted Doing so will ensure that the remaining recording time will be displayed accurately Repeatedly charging and discharging the battery pack will eventually shorten its battery life You can check the battery life on the Battery Hour Meter status screen QJ 183 or the battery information screen press the BATT INFO button while the camera is turned off Fully charging the battery pack and then discharging it will give you a more accurate reading e USA and Canada only The Lithium ion polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable Please call 1 800 8 BAT TERY for information on how to recycle this battery Using a Household Power Outlet You can also power the camera directly from a power outlet using the supplied CA 940N Compact Power Adapter 1 Set the switch to OFF 2 Connect the compact power adapter s DC plug to the DC IN terminal on the camera 3 Connect the power cord to the compact power adapter and plug it into a power outlet imeortant e Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the compact power adapter 1 NOTES e When using the camera with a household powe
132. c Off Special Recording Modes Shooting frame rate dzs4 4 min S amp F STBY gt 00 276 55 11 F gt 537 min BERN RAW 50 mm 4096x2160 109 les 24 59 GAP a Playback frame rate 3 Press the START STOP button to begin recording e he tally lamp illuminates e S amp F changes to S amp F while recording 4 Press the START STOP button again to stop recording e Aclip is recorded at the set frame rate e S amp F STBY during 4K and 2K modes or S amp F STBY during MXF mode appears at the top of the Screen e The tally lamp goes out Setting the Shooting Frame Rate from the Shooting Screen If you set an assignable button to S amp F Frame Rate you can conveniently set the shooting frame rate from the shooting screen without having to go through the menus 1 Set an assignable button to S amp F Frame Rate LL 111 2 Press the assignable button e The shooting frame rate will be highlighted in orange 3 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired frame rate 4 Press SET e The display of the shooting frame rate will return to normal 1 NOTES e You can use only one special recording mode at a time In addition slow amp fast motion mode cannot be used with double slot recording While recording you cannot change the shooting frame rate For lower shooting frame rates it may take approximately 1 second to stop recording During special recording mode
133. cal 50 50 75 80 Optional Accessories Approximate times when shooting in 2K mode The following are the shooting times with the monitor unit attached LCD screen and viewfinder on output from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminal on and when simultaneously recording an MXF clip 60 Mbps 1920x1080 23 98P Recording mode EE TOR Frame rate Usage time BP 950G BP 955 BP 970G BP 975 12 bit 59 94P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 2048x1080 Recording typical 50 50 75 80 10 bit 50 00P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 9048x1080 Recording typical 59 55 75 80 24 00P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 Recording typical 55 55 15 80 10 bit 59 94P Recording maximum 85 85 120 130 2048x1080 Recording typical 50 50 70 75 50 00P Recording maximum 90 90 125 135 Recording typical 59 59 15 80 Approximate times for MXF mode The following are the shooting times with the monitor unit attached LCD screen and viewfinder on and output from the HD SD SDI terminal on Bit rate Resolution Frame rate Usage time BP 950G BP 955 BP 970G BP 975 50 Mbps 24 00P Recording maximum 155 155 220 235 1920x1080 Recording typical 95 95 135 140 TA 100 Tripod Adapter The TA 100 allows you to quickly mount unmount the camera on from a tripod This mark identifies genuine Canon video accessories When you use Canon vid
134. camera s or the handle unit s accessory shoe e Use the attachment base at the bottom of the monitor unit to attach it directly to the camera Use the attachment base at the back of the monitor unit to attach it to the accessory shoe on the front of the handle unit 3 Tighten the monitor unit s lock screw 4 Connect the monitor unit s cables to the camera e Align the W marks on the cables and terminals Then connect cable number 1 with the white line to the camera s EXT 1 terminal and cable number 2 to the EXT 2 terminal Removing the Monitor Unit 1 Set the switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the monitor unit s cables from the camera s EXT 1 and EXT 2 terminals e Pull back the metallic tips of the cable to release the cable and then disconnect the cable 3 Unscrew the lock screw and then gently slide out the monitor unit from the accessory shoe 36 Preparing the Camera Using the Viewfinder Adjusting the Viewfinder s Position 1 Gently pull out the viewfinder until it stops 2 Adjust the viewfinder s angle as necessary e The viewfinder unit can be adjusted up to 60 vertically Attaching and Detaching the Eye Cup Attach the eye cup so that it covers the rubber portion of the viewfinder unit e The dioptric adjustment dial can be operated even with the eye cup attached e For left eye use attach the eye cup so that the protruding portion faces the opposite side Eye cup Viewfinder unit Detach the
135. ching to Other Index Screens All of the clips on a CF card can be accessed from the clip index screen However you can switch to other index screens that show only clips with an N mark R Mark index screen clips with a MA mark M Mark index screen or photos Photos index screen Photos are saved on the SD card 1 Press the INDEX button e The index screen selection menu appears 2 Select the desired index screen and then press SET lob INDEX i e The selected index screen appears e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e Press the INDEX button again to return to the clip index screen Playing Back Clips You can play back clips from the clip index screen IMN Mark index screen and BM Mark index screen Use the playback control buttons on the monitor unit When the monitor unit is not attached you have limited playback control options play pause stop only with the buttons on the camera and full playback control options using the joystick and joystick guide 1 Move the orange selection frame to the clip you want to play back 2 Press the I button to start playback e Playback will start from the clip selected and continue until the end of the last clip in the index screen When the last frame of the last clip is reached playback will be paused amp 3 SIS Ly T y M INDEX M Playing Back MXF Clips e Press the B EE button again or press SET to pause resume the playback
136. clip you can add an OK mark M or check mark M to the clip to flag it and set it apart When the camera is in wv mode you can display an index screen that contains only clips with an W mark or only clips with a M mark LL 128 Furthermore you can use the f mark to protect important clips as clips with an IIR mark cannot be deleted To add an If mark or M mark to the last clip recorded in camera mode you must first set in advance an assignable button to Add IN Mark or Add M Mark 1 Set an assignable button to Add N Mark or Add M Mark LL 111 e To add both types of clip marks to different clips set one assignable button to Add IN Mark and another assignable button to Add M Mark 2 After recording a clip press the assignable button e A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations QA 50 you can set an Id mark or a M mark remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 After recording a clip press M MARK on the Wi Fi Remote screen to set a an N mark or M MARK to set a M mark e OK Mark or Check Mark will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and the mark will be applied to the clip 2 Press amp to close the message 1 NOTES e A clip cannot have both an f mark and a M mark at the same time 104 Reviewing an MXF
137. cord cC LD ES QO SS 1200 Shoulder Strap Adapter Base for 0 64 cm 1 4 in WFT Attachment Bracket Tape Measure Hooks x 2 Tripods Comes pre attached to the camera Used to secure the optional WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter when it is attached to the camera 13 14 Names of Parts Names of Parts C500 14 15 16 1 MAGN magnification button Q4 80 Assignable button 1 LZ 111 2 PEAKING button LQ 80 Assignable button 2 LZ 111 3 ND FILTER buttons LZ 73 4 ZEBRA button LL 83 Assignable button 3 LL 111 5 WFM waveform monitor button LL 100 Assignable button 4 LZ 111 6 switch LL 26 7 Tally lamp LQ 51 8 DISP display button LL 55 129 BATT INFO battery information button LL 24 9 SELECT dial SET button LL 29 10 Control dial LL 71 74 11 STATUS button 4 178 12 white balance adjustment button LL 76 INDEX button LL 128 BlUl stop button LL 128 13 review recording button CL 104 gt ill play pause button LL 128 14 LENS EXCHANGE button LT 34 Assignable button 5 LL 111 15 LUT lookup table button LL 148 Assignable button 6 Q 111 16 CUSTOM PICTURE button LL 114 Names of Parts 17 MON external monitor terminals 1 and 2 LL 41 18 WET terminal LL 50 19 EXT modular unit terminals 1 and 2 LL 35 20 REMOTE terminal For connecting commercially available remote controllers 21 SYNC O
138. cording Media and Accessories Cannot insert the recording media The CF card or SD card you are trying to insert is not facing the correct direction Turn it over and insert it Cannot record on the CF card A compatible CF card must be used 1 43 Initialize the CF card LL 45 when you use it with the camera for the first time The CF card is full or it already contains the maximum number of clips 999 clips Delete some clips QJ 136 to free some space or replace the CF card 188 Troubleshooting Cannot record on the SD card Initialize the SD card L 45 when you use it with the camera for the first time The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure Change the position of the LOCK switch The SD card is full Delete some photos Q 162 to free some space or replace the SD card The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value Set the Other Functions 3 Photo Numbering setting to Reset and insert a new SD card Recording to and playing back from a CF card is slow This may occur as video is recorded deleted over time Save your clips LT 155 and initialize the CF card 9 45 The optional RC V100 Remote Controller or commercially available remote control does not work Make sure that the Other Settings 93 REMOTE Term setting is set to RC V100 when using the optional RC V100 Hemote Controller or Standard when using a commercially available remote control
139. ction if a message appears on the screen The messages in this section appear in alphabetical order For error messages related to the optional WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter refer to the roubleshooting section of the WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter Guide for Canon Camcorders LL 34 Accessing CF A CF B Do not remove You opened the CF card slot cover while the camera was accessing the CF card Close the CF card slot cover Camera Lens communication error Clean the lens s contacts and reattach the lens The camera cannot communicate with the lens Remove the lens while making sure that dust does not accumulate on the lens or enter the camera Then wipe the lens mount and lens contacts with a soft cloth Cannot acquire battery information Battery information can be displayed only for batteries bearing the Intelligent System mark Cannot communicate with the battery pack Continue using this battery pack You attached a battery pack that does not bear the Intelligent System mark If you are using a battery pack that bears the Intelligent System mark there may be a problem with the camera or battery pack Consult a Canon Service Center Cannot play back The file control information is corrupted or there was a decoder error Turn off the camera and back on again If this does not solve the problem consult a Canon Service Center e Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered CF cards or clips with corrupt file con
140. ctorscope Spot Normal e e 11 Gain 1x 5x o o Edge Monitor Type 1 Type 2 o e 101 Gain Off 1 to 15 12 o Language amp 9 Deutsch English Espanol Francais Italiano Polski Pyccknii 5 ch xz J o o 28 304 AAs REMOTE Term RC V100 Standard e o 49 Assign Button 1 to 15 See footnote 3 o 1 to 9 e Tally Lamp On Off e Media Access LED On Off e o Fan On Automatic o 59 Genlock Adjust 1023 to 1023 000 e Rec Review Entire Clip Last 4 sec e 104 Delete Last Clip Cancel OK o Clips Copy All Clips Cancel OK e 135 Copy BI Clips Cancel OK e 135 Delete All Clips Cancel OK e 136 Delete All M Marks Cancel OK e 135 Photo Numbering Reset Continu e e 165 Delete All Photos Cancel OK e 163 Add File To Clip On Off e E 117 To Photo On Off 175 176 Menu Options Menu item Submenu Setting options CAMERA MEDIA I Custom Function Shockless WB On Off Control Dial Iris ISO Gain Off IS0 Gain Off Grip Ctrl Dial ae He a Control Dial Dir Reverse Normal Grip Ctrl Dial Dir Reverse Normal SELECT Dial Dir Reverse Normal e 123 F Assist B amp W Both Magnify Peaking Off Magn Add Disp Peaking Edg
141. d HD recording MXF data Shoot in 4K mode L 60 and record 4K RAW data using an external recorder connected to the camera s 3G SDI terminals LT 41 Q Insert a CF card into the camera to record an MXF clip simultaneously with the 4K RAW data LL 63 Develop the RAW data using the Cinema RAW Development software L 152 to generate full quality data e You can also generate proxy data with the software Associated plugin Q Transfer the MXF file or proxy data generated by the software to your NLE system and edit offline LL 155 Q Perform color grading based on the full quality data and the edit decision list EDL created from offline editing 2 4K Workflow Overview Color Grading with the ACES Workflow ACESproxy10 ACESproxy10 video data that is output from the MON 2 terminal when performing on set color Post production Open EXR ACES Cinema RAW Development output External 4K recorder Color grading RAW recording MON 2 output ACES proxy10 Inverse ASC On set Color Grading grading Use the 45 AK 2K MXF 3 MON 1 amp 2 39 ACESPX10 setting to enable ACESproxy10 output ASC CDL Refers to the list that contains color grading adjustment data This step requires equipment compatible with ASC CDL IDT Inout Device Transform Refers to the table used for converting color information of the input device to ACE
142. d Replace or charge the battery pack U Mark Error Could not add a M mark or M mark If the message appears in camera mode try adding the mark again If that does not work add the mark in vp mode If the message appears in t mode turn off the camera and then back on Then try to add the mark again Check the data on CF A CF B Initializing the card is also recommended The CF card cannot be used for any of the following reasons e A problem has occurred with the CF card e The camera cannot read the CF card s data e The CF card was initialized using a computer e The CF card has been partitioned Save your clips QJ 155 and initialize the CF card Q 45 Check the SD card The SD card cannot be accessed Check that the SD card is inserted correctly and not malfunctioning Due to an SD card error photos cannot be taken or viewed Remove and then reinsert the SD card or use a different SD card Data on CF A CF B needs recovering Attempt to recover If data on the CF card is corrupted such as when the power suddenly turned off while recording the data must be recovered When this message appears select OK and press SET Fan error The cooling fan may not be working properly Consult a Canon Service Center File name error The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value Set Other Functions 939 Photo Numbering to Reset and delete all the photos on the SD card Q 162 or initialize i
143. d 67 Changing the Shutter Speed Mode and Value 68 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 68 ISO Speed Gain 70 Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value 70 Using the Control Dial 71 Hemote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 71 ND Filter 73 Using the ND Filter 73 Hemote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 73 Adjusting the Aperture 74 Using the Control Dial 74 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 75 White Balance 76 oetting the White Balance 76 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 77 Adjusting the Focus 79 Adjusting the Focus Manually 79 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 79 Using the Focus Assistance Functions 80 Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns 82 Displaying Onscreen Markers 82 Displaying Zebra Patterns 83 Setting the Time Code 84 Selecting the Running Mode 84 Selecting Drop or Non Drop Frame 85 Putting the Time Code Display on Hold 85 Setting the User Bit 87 Synchronizing with an External Device 88 Connecting an External Device 88 Reference Video Signal Input Genlock Synchronization 88 Time Code Signal Inout 89 Reference Video Signal Output 90 Time Code Signal Output 91 Recording Audio 92 Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Input Source to the Camera 92 Selecting the Audio Input from the XLR Terminals 93 Adjusting the Audio Level from the XLR Terminals 94 Adjusting the Audio Level from the MIC Terminal 95 Monitoring the Audio with Headphones 96 Using Metadata 97 Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF Utility 97 Setting a U
144. d access indicator will flash as the photo is being recorded 5 Press the B button to stop playback Taking Photos imeortant e Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss 160 Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera EE Do not remove the SD card 1 NOTES e f the LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent writing you will not be able to record a photo Change the position of the LOCK switch in advance e Even if Other Functions 9 Custom Function 39 Scan Reverse Rec is set to a setting other than Off photos will not be inverted Photo Playback You can view the photos that you took with the camera Operating modes MEDIA Displaying the Photos Index Screen Display the Photos index screen to view photos 1 Set the ISTIS switch to MEDIA e The camera switches to MEDIA mode and the clip index screen appears 2 Press the INDEX button e The index screen selection menu appears 3 Select Photo Index and then press SET e The Photos index screen appears e After you are finished viewing photos press the INDEX button to return to the clip index screen Viewing Photos 1 Move the orange selection frame to the desired photo 2 Press the IH button to view the photo e The photo playback screen appears and the selected photo is displayed e Use the I 4 P P buttons
145. d clip s thumbnail SEDE e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation 1 NOTES e Up to 100 shot marks J and Bl marks combined can be added to a single clip e There may be up to a 0 5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camera adds the shot mark Deleting Shot Marks 1 Open the Shot Mark index screen or Expand Clip index screen 2 Select the desired frame thumbnail and then press SET to open the clip menu 3 Select Del Shot Mark 1 or Del Shot Mark 2 and then press SET e he clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 4 Select OK and then press SET e The selected mark is deleted and the screen changes back to the previous index screen e f a frame has no shot marks it will no longer appear in the Shot Mark index screen e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation Changing a Clip s Thumbnail You can change the thumbnail that appears in the clip index screen to a thumbnail of a frame that appears in the Shot Mark index screen or Expand Clip index screen 1 Open the Shot Mark index screen or Expand Clip index screen 2 Select the desired frame thumbnail and then press SET to open the clip menu 3 Select Set Index Picture and then press SET e The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 4 Select OK and then press SET e The selected frame is set as the thumbnail and the screen changes back to the pr
146. d color temperature will be set and the camera will exit the direct setting mode e On the screen The selected color temperature will appear next to the white balance icon On the rear panel The color temperature value will disappear and the display will return to normal all displays will reappear 1 NOTES e f you set an assignable button to FUNC WB A 111 you can press the button to enter the direct setting mode with the white balance icon highlighted and ready to be adjusted Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations LL 50 you can adjust the white balance remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 Press SA on the Wi Fi Remote screen 2 Select the desired white balance mode If you selected amp or 3 Press the adjustment value W 0 8 3 or color temperature 5500K I and then select the desired value from the list e You may need to scroll up down to see all the available values 78 White Balance e The selected value will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera Color temperature If you selected A or AB 3 Point the camera at a white object so that it fills the whole screen e Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording e Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed 4 Press r4 e f a custom white balance has not yet
147. d from the memory card as well Maximum Recording Time approximate continuous recording 16 GB CF Card 50 Mbps 40 min 35 Mbps 55 min 25 Mbps 80 min 64 GB CF Card 50 Mbps 160 min 35 Mbps 225 min 25 Mbps 310 min Image Sensor Super 35mm equivalent CMOS sensor approx 8 850 000 effective pixels 4096x2160 Viewfinder 1 3 cm 0 52 in approx 1 555 000 dots 10096 coverage Lens Mount Canon EF mount compatible with Canon EF lenses including EF S lenses PL Lens mount without data interface terminals Lens multiplication factor for 35mm equivalent focal length Approx 1 46 when the horizontal resolution is 4096 or 2048 Approx 1 53 when the horizontal resolution is 3840 or 1920 ND Filter Built in Off 2 4 or 6 stops motor operated White Balance Custom white balance two sets A and B color temperature setting 2 000K to 15 000KJ two preset settings daylight 5 400 K and incandescent lamp 3 200 KK that can be further fine tuned Color temperatures are approximate 202 Specifications e ai Iris 1 2 stop increments 1 3 stop increments fine tuning ISO Speed 1 stop increments ISO 320 ISO 400 to ISO 12800 ISO 20000 ISO 250007 ISO 512004 ISO 800007 1 3 stop increments ISO 320 to ISO 20000 ISO 25000 to ISO 800004 Gain 6 dB to 30 dB 33 dBf to 42 dB 8 dB increments O dB to 24 dB 33 dB to 42 dB fine tuning in 0 5 dB increments With extended ISO Gain range Shutter Speed Sp
148. de 3 Press the current shutter speed angle value or clear scan frequency and select the desired value from the list e You may need to scroll up down to see all the available values e The selected value will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera Shutter Speed Using Slow Shutter Mode When recording in dark surroundings you can obtain a brighter picture by using slow shutter mode You can also use this mode when you wish to add certain effects to your recordings such as blurring the background during panning shots or recording a moving subject with an afterimage trail 69 e Image quality may not be as good as when using faster shutter soeeds in brighter surroundings 1 NOTES e When recording under artificial light sources such as fluorescent mercury or halogen lamps the screen may flicker depending on the shutter soeed You may be able to avoid flicker by setting the shutter mode to Speed and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system 1 50 or 1 100 for 50 Hz recordings or 1 60 or 1 120 for 60 Hz recordings May not be available depending on the frame rate Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the picture to appear soft or out of focus To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction use a faster shutter speed a denser ND filter LL 73 or open up the aperture When the shutter speed mode is
149. dings Clip Name settings Title Prefix Determines the first 2 characters of the clip name Combined with the Number Setting setting this constitutes the 6 character clip name Number Setting Determines the last 4 digits of the clip name Combined with the Title Prefix setting this constitutes the 6 character clip name Select Set to assign a desired number to the first clip you record or select Reset to reset the number to 0001 The numerals increase every time a clip is recorded Country Code This identifier is the country code defined by ISO 3166 1 and is to be entered starting from the left Organization This identifier represents the organization that owns or operates the camera and can be obtained by registering with the SMPTE Registration Authority If the organization is not registered enter 0000 User Code This identifier designates the user Leave this blank if Organization is set to 0000 Rec Command When you connect the camera to another device using the 3G SDI terminals during 4K and 2K modes or HD SD SDI terminal during MXF mode if you start or stop recording with the camera the other device will also start or stop recording I E Video Setup menu v amp mode only Menu item Submenu Setting options LI System Frequency 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz 24 00 Hz 60 64 HD SD SDI Output HD SD Off o Scan Mode P PsF SYNC OUT
150. e CF card selected for recording is indicated with a B mark 2 CF card recording operation 4K and 2K modes e When double slot recording LL 46 is activated the icon will appear to the left of the operation indicator 10 Remaining battery time e The icon shows a rough estimate of the remaining charge as a percentage of the full charge of the battery pack The remaining recording playback time of the battery pack is displayed in minutes next to the icon e dum gt m i n i 41 gt 71 in red When Z is displayed replace the battery pack with a fully charged one e Depending on the conditions under which the camera and the battery pack are used the actual battery charge may not be indicated accurately 12 Recording command status 4K and 2K modes Recording operation MXF mode REC gt Recording STBY gt Record pause QNT REC Interval recording INT STBY INT flashes gt Interval record pause FRM REC Frame recording FRM STBY gt Frame record pause after starting recording FRM STBY FRM flashes Frame record pause before starting recording S amp F REC Slow amp fast motion recording S amp F STBY gt Slow amp fast motion record pause PRE REC Pre recording after pressing the START STOP button PRE REC STBY Pre recording before pressing the START STOP button e In MXF mode when double slot recording LL 47 is activated the icon will appear to the left of the operation indicator Also does
151. e Mon Off 3D Rec Mode On Off Scan Reverse Rec Both Vertical Horizontal Off Character Rec On Off ia START STOP On Off Reset Hour Meter Cancel OK o o Wi Fi Remote Set Up New For details refer to WFT E6 Wireless File Select Transmitter Guide for Canon Camcorders Edit PDF file e Camera Settings Select User User Setting Initialize Media CF A Cancel OK e e CF B 45 SD Card Complete Quick o Firmware o Not available in the Photos index screen or photo playback screen The default value depends on the country region or purchase Setting options for Assign Button INONE ND ND PEAKING ZEBRA WFM EDGE MON MAGN Color Bars Markers LCD Setup VF Setup LCD VF B amp W View Assist LUT Resize MON Output Resize MXF Output Onscreen Display Add Shot Mark 1 Add Shot Mark 2 Add Mark Add M Mark Time Code Time Code Hold Headphone Headphone Audio Output CH Audio Level Photo FUNC FUNC Shutter FUNC ISO Gain FUNC WB S amp F Frame Rate My Menu Initialize Media LENS EXCHANGE User Setting NONE The default settings are as follows 1 MAGN 2 PEAKING 3 ZEBRA 4 WFM 5 LENS EXCHANGE 6 LUT 7 IMAGN 8 WFM 9 EDGE MON 10 to 15 NONE Available in the clip index screen a
152. e The camera will automatically end the direct setting mode in the following cases If no operation was performed for more than 6 seconds If the menu custom picture menu or a status screen was opened f the aperture was adjusted or the ND filter setting was changed f the control dial s function is set to ISO Gain and you operate the control dial while adjusting the white balance or shutter speed in direct setting mode If you set an assignable button to FUNC LZ 111 you can press that button instead of the FUNC button to enter the direct setting mode Shutter Speed Set the shutter soeed based on the recording conditions For example you may want to set slower shutter speeds in darker environments The camera offers the following 5 modes Operating modes CAMERA Speed Allows you to set the shutter speed in fractions of a second You can select the increment to use when 4K 2K MXF adjusting the shutter speed between 1 3 stop and 1 4 stop increments Angle You can set the shutter angle to determine the shutter speed Shutter Speed Clear Scan Set the frequency in order to record CRT computer monitors without displaying black bands or flicker on the screen Slow You can set slower shutter speeds to obtain brighter recordings in places with insufficient lighting This mode is not available during slow amp fast motion recording mode Off The camera uses a standard shutter sp
153. e and resizing method with the 4 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 HD SD SDI 3 Scan Mode and 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 Resize MXF Output settings Depending on the video configuration the scan mode may be set automatically e f necessary you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor LL 151 Gi NOTES e When you output from the HD SD SDI terminal video in HD that was shot with Canon Log gamma you can apply a LUT LL 148 Using the HDMI OUT Terminal The HDMI M OUT terminal also offers a digital connection and outputs both a video and audio signal The output signal will automatically switch to HD or SD depending on the capability of the external monitor You can select the resizing method LL 63 when the camera outputs HD video during 4K or 2K mode Not available for 24 00 Hz recordings i NOTES e Correct operation cannot be guaranteed when connecting the camera to DVI monitors e Video may not be output correctly depending on the monitor In such case use another terminal e The HDMI OUT terminal is output only Do not connect the camera to another device s output terminal using the HDMI OUT terminal as this will cause a malfunction e f necessary you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor LL 151 e You can select the SD resizing method Q4 150 150 Connecting to an External Monitor Using the SYNC OUT Terminal CA
154. e aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the picture to appear soft or out of focus To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction use a denser ND filter or a faster shutter speed LT 67 Operating modes CAMERA 4k 2K MXF Using the ND Filter Press the ND FILTER or button to select the desired ND filter setting e Repeatedly pressing ND FILTER button will change the ND filter setting in the following order ND1 2 stops gt ND2 4 stops ND3 6 stops ND filter off The ND FILTER button cycles through the settings in reverse order Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations Q 50 you can adjust the ND filter remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application Press ND or ND on the Wi Fi Remote screen e he function is identical to that of the ND FILTER and buttons on the camera SLOT SELECT e The selected ND filter setting will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera i NOTES e Depending on the scene the color may change when turning the ND filter on off Setting a custom white balance LL 76 may be effective in such case e f you set an assignable button to ND or ND Q 111 you can press the button to adjust the ND filter e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can use the remote controller s ND button in the same way a
155. e available from the same list Not available during slow amp fast motion recording mode 67 68 Shutter Speed Changing the Shutter Speed Mode and Value 1 Open the shutter Mode submenu PAR Camera Setup 9 Shutter 3 Mode 2 Select the desired mode and then press SET e f you selected Speed you can select the increment scale to use when adjusting the shutter speed otherwise skip to step 5 3 Open the Shutter Increment submenu PER Camera Setup amp Shutter 99 Shutter Increment 4 Select 1 3 stop or 1 4 stop and then press SET 5 Adjust the shutter speed angle value or clear scan frequency using the direct setting mode e Repeatedly press the FUNC button to highlight the shutter soeed display select the desired value and then press SET For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode LL 66 i NOTES e f you set an assignable button to FUNC Shutter QA 111 you can press the button to enter the direct setting mode with the shutter speed highlighted and ready to be adjusted Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote PAR Camera Setup Shutter Mode Angle Jill Camera Setup Shutter Shutter Increment 1 4 stop After completing the necessary preparations LL 50 you can adjust the shutter speed remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 Press ANGLE on the Wi Fi Remote screen 2 Select the desired mo
156. e battery packs in a dry place at temperatures no higher than 30 C 86 F e To extend the battery life of the battery pack discharge it completely before storing it e Charge and discharge all your battery packs fully at least once a year Always attach the battery terminal cover Do not allow any metal objects to touch the terminals figure 1 as this can cause a short circuit and damage the battery pack Attach the terminal cover whenever the battery pack is not being used figure 2 The battery terminal cover has a L_2 shaped hole This is useful when you wish to differentiate between charged and uncharged battery packs For example with charged battery packs attach the terminal cover so that the L__2 shaped hole shows the colored label Figure 1 Figure 2 Backside orte Terminal cover attached battery pack Charged Uncharged Remaining battery time If the remaining battery time displayed is not correct charge the battery pack fully Still the correct time may not be displayed if a fully charged battery pack is used continuously in high temperatures or it is left unused for long periods of time Also the correct remaining time may not be displayed depending on the battery life Use the time shown on the screen as an approximation Using higher capacity batteries You can use the optional BP 970G BP 975 battery packs with this camera However as the battery compartment cover cannot be closed when usi
157. e been altered to make them easier to read Illustrations in the manual show the Canon EOS C500 camera with a Canon EF 50mm f 1 4 USM lens attached 12 About this Manual The arrow is used to abbreviate menu selections For a detailed explanation on how to use the menus refer to Using the Menus LL 29 For a concise summary of all available menu options and settings refer to the appendix Menu Options LL 167 Operating modes CAMERA indicates that a function is available in the operating mode the two icons left of the dividing bar and system priority the three icons to the right of the dividing bar indicated and function is not available For a detailed explanation refer to 7urning the Camera On and Off LL 26 and indicates that the Selecting the System Priority LL 60 64 Setting the Time Code While recording the camera can generate a time code signal and embed it in your recordings You can have the camera output the time code signal from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals HD SD SDI terminal or TIME 84 CODE terminal QA 91 In addition you can superimpose the time code on video output from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal While playing back video recorded on a CF card you can output the time code on the CF card from the HD SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal Additionally you can superimpose the time code on the picture from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal For recordings wit
158. e decreased processing performance Required only when checking SDI output on an external monitor We recommend keeping RAW clips on a separate drive from the save destination of developed clips 1 NOTES e For details on precautions and restrictions refer to the documentation supplied with Cinema RAW Development Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development Windows Installing Cinema RAW Development 1 Double click crdw zip the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site to decompress it e The folder crdw will be created that contains the file crdw exe 2 Select your area 3 Select your country region and then click Next e f you selected Asia or Oceania in step 2 skip to step 5 4 Select the language to be displayed during installation Developing RAW Clips 5 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications exit other applications and then click OK e The softwares license agreement appears 6 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation e f you do not select Yes you cannot install the software 153 e When the installation has completed Installation has completed successfully appears oO 7 Click Next and then click Finish Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Cinema RAW Development gt Uninstall Cinema RAW Development e A confirmation screen appears 2 Click OK to begin uninsta
159. e picture may seem darker due to light fall off or peripheral illumination drop If the camera has correction data available for the EF lens used it can apply this correction data to compensate as necessary Operating modes CAMERA CAK j 2K J MXF 1 Attach the lens you want to use MEM PAR Camera Setup 2 Open the peripheral illumination correction screen PAR Camera Setup 93 Periph Illum Corr e f correction data is available the lens model name will appear on the screen e f correction data is not available Periph Illum Corr will appear grayed out Visit your local Canon Web site and check if there is correction data available for the lens you are using If so download the necessary update package and upgrade the camera s firmware following the instructions supplied therein 3 Select On and then press SET e As long as Wl Camera Setup 99 Periph Illum Corr is set to On the camera will automatically apply the appropriate correction data 1 NOTES About lens correction data he camera contains a register of correction data for compatible lenses that were available at the time the camera went on sale Correction data for future lenses will be made available as part of the regular updates released for the camera s firmware For more details visit your local Canon Web site Depending on the recording conditions noise may appear in the periphery of the image as a result of the correction The
160. e slots you can select New File to save the file in the first available slot 3 Select OK and then press SET e The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the SD card overwriting the file in that slot When the confirmation screen appears press SET 4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu Replacing a File in the Camera with a File on an SD Card E Transfer File 1 After selecting a file in the camera to replace open the Load From szl Pomen Load From 1 E Transfer File Load From f2 2 Select the file to transfer to the camera and then press SET 3 Select OK and then press SET e The file in the camera will be overwritten by the one on the SD card When the confirmation screen appears oress SET 4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu Copying a File from an SD Card to the Camera E Transfer File 1 After selecting a file on the SD card open the Copy To Cam submenu Transfer File 3 Copy To Cam 2 Select the file slot under which to save the file and then press SET 3 Select OK and then press SET e The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the camera overwriting the file in that slot When the confirmation screen appears press SET 4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu Copy To Cam Custom Picture Settings Replacing a File on an SD Card with a File in the C
161. ear on the lower left of the screen 1 NOTES a e f you set an assignable button to View Assist LL 111 you can press the button to enable the view assistance function LZ LCD VF Setup View Assist Recording Video Using the Internal Cooling Fan During CAMERA mode the camera uses an internal cooling fan to reduce the camera s internal heat Operating modes CAMERA 1 Open the Fan submenu f Other Functions Other Functions Fan 2 Select the desired option and then press SET Fan Options On The cooling fan is active at all times regardless of the camera s Automatic internal temperature Automatic During record pause mode the cooling fan is always activated While you are recording while 8 REC appears on the screen if the cameras internal temperature lowers to a predetermined level the cooling fan will deactivate If the cameras internal temperature rises to a predetermined level the cooling fan will activate automatically Y will appear on the screen even while you are recording 1 NOTES e While the cooling fan is set to Automatic when you start the camera in a cooled down state and shoot in 4K or 2K mode the cooling fan will activate in approximately 10 minutes based on a surrounding temperature of 25 C 77 F Also depending on the surrounding temperature the cooling fan may stop after a short period of time or continue to operate o9 60 Vid
162. ecording mode can be used with slow amp fast motion recording When you develop the clip using the Cinema RAW Development software L 152 you can covert it using options such as 4K1K video 4K2K video letterboxed and 2K 1K video full HD video side cropped 12 bit Standard recording modes for 2K clips These recording modes use the RGB color space 4 4 4 color sampling and 10 bit have a 12 bit or 10 bit bit depth High image quality than 10 bit mode OK Recording mode for use with slow amp fast motion recording Q 108 when you want to set the shooting frame rate from 62 to 120P for 59 94 Hz recordings or 52 to 100P for 10 bit user 10 bi 50 00 Hz recordings This recording mode uses the YCC color space 4 2 2 color sampling and has a 10 bit bit depth HRAW 4K AK1K RAW i NOTES e During slow amp fast motion recording when you want to set the shooting frame rate to 1 to 6OP for 59 94 Hz recordings or 1 to 5OP for 50 00 Hz recordings we recommend you set Mode to RAW fm 12 bit or cam 10 bit 62 Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate Selecting the Resolution 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 1 Open the Resolution submenu 2k AK 2K MXF Setup gt 4K 4096 3840 or 2K 2048 1920 4K 4096 3840 Resolution 2 Select the desired resolution and then press SET Resolution e Available resolution options depend on the system priority and
163. eed 1 3 stop increments 1 4 stop increments angle clear scan slow off 5 e Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction Available for Canon EF lenses Some Canon EF lenses are not compatible with peripheral illumination correction Sensor Sensitivity MXF mode ISO 640 0 dB 2000 lux 89 996 reflection 59 94 Hz mode F9 1920x1080 at 59 94i 50 00 Hz mode F10 1920x1080 at 50 00 S N Ratio MXF mode ISO 850 using Canon Log gamma 54 dB typical 1920x1080 59 94 Hz mode at 29 97P 50 00 Hz mode at 25 00P Subject Illumination MXF mode 24 dB with a f 1 2 lens 59 94 Hz mode 0 30 lux 29 97P shutter speed 1 30 50 00 Hz mode 0 25 lux 25 00P shutter speed 1 25 Size of Photos 1920x1080 pixels 1280x720 pixels only when capturing a photo from a clip Terminals e 3G SDI Terminals 1 and 2 BNC jack output only 0 8 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced 2 97 Gbps SMPTE 424M SMPTE ST 425 1 Video Resolution 4096x2160 3840x2160 4096x1080 3840x1080 Mode RAW 10 bit HRAW 10 bit 4K1K RAW 10 bit RGB 4 4 4 12 bit RGB 4 4 4 10 bit YCC 4 2 2 10 bit Frame rate 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P 50 00P 25 00P 24 00P Color space BT 709 DCI P3 Cinema Gamut BT 2020 Embedded audio time code VITC LTC Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings MON Terminals 1 and 2 BNC jack output only 0 8 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced 1 485 Gbps SMPTE ST 292 1 Video Hesolution 2048x1080 1920x1080 Mode
164. eed based on the frame rate Available Shutter Speeds The available shutter speeds vary depending on the frame rate Frame rate 59 94 Hz and 24 00 Hz recordings Shutter speed mode 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P 24 00P Off 1 60 1 30 1 24 Speed 2 1 3 stop 1 60 1 80 1 100 1 125 1 160 1 200 1 30 1 40 1 50 1 60 1 80 1 100 1 25 1 30 1 40 1 50 1 60 1 80 increments 1 250 1 320 1 400 1 500 1 640 1 125 1 160 1 200 1 250 1 320 1 100 1 125 1 160 1 200 1 250 1 800 1 1000 1 1250 1 1600 1 2000 1 400 1 500 1 640 1 800 1 1000 1 320 1 400 1 500 1 640 1 800 1 1250 1 1600 1 2000 1 1000 1 1250 1 1600 1 2000 1 4 stop 1 60 1 75 1 90 1 100 1 120 1 150 1 30 1 34 1 40 1 48 1 60 1 75 1 90 1 24 1 30 1 34 1 40 1 48 1 60 1 75 increments 1 180 1 210 1 250 1 300 1 360 1 100 1 120 1 150 1 180 1 210 1 250 1 90 1 100 1 120 1 150 1 180 1 210 1 420 1 500 1 600 1 720 1 840 1 300 1 360 1 420 1 500 1 600 1 720 1 250 1 300 1 360 1 420 1 500 1 600 1 1000 1 1200 1 1400 1 1700 1 840 1 1000 1 1200 1 1400 1 1700 1 720 1 840 1 1000 1 1200 1 1400 1 2000 1 2000 1 1700 1 2000 Angle 360 240 216 180 120 90 360 240 216 180 120 108 360 345 6 288 240 180 60 45 30 22 5 15 11 25 90 60 45 30 22 5 15 172 8 144 120 90 86 4 72 11 2
165. en when using a UDMA compatible CF card imeortant e About high capacity CF cards You can use CF cards with a capacity of 128 GB or larger with this camcorder but such CF cards are initialized using the exFAT file system When using exFAT formatted CF cards with other devices digital recorders card readers etc make sure that the external device is compatible with exFAT For more information on compatibility contact the computer operating system or memory card manufacturer If you use exFAT formatted CF cards with a computer OS that is not exFAT compatible you may be prompted to format the CF card In such case cancel the operation to prevent data loss i NOTES e Proper operation cannot be guaranteed for all CF cards Inserting a CF Card You can insert a CF card into CF card slot A or slot B If you have two CF cards you can use both slots 1 Slide the CF card slot cover switch in the direction of the arrow e The CF card slot cover will open upward slot A or downward slot B 2 Insert the CF card straight with the label facing up all the way into the slot 3 Close the CF card slot cover e Do not force the cover closed if the CF card is not correctly inserted 44 Preparing Recording Media Checking the Status of the CF Card Slots You can check the status of the CF card slots immediately by looking at the CF CF access indicator Refer to the following table Access indicator color C
166. en you turn the control dial on the camera or on the grip unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 respectively Iris Off Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations LL 50 you can adjust the ISO speed gain remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 To change the gain value press ISO and then Gain on the Wi Fi Remote screen 2 Press the current ISO speed or gain value and select the desired value from the list e You may need to scroll up down to see all the available values e The selected value will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera 2 ISO Speed Gain 1 notes e When high ISO speeds or gain levels are set the picture may flicker slightly e When high ISO speeds or gain levels are set bright red green or blue dots may appear on the screen In such case use a faster shutter speed Q4 67 or select a lower ISO speed or gain value e When the ISO speed or gain level is changed some noise may appear momentarily on the screen Do not adjust the ISO speed gain level while recording e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can adjust the ISO speed or gain value with the remote controller s ISO GAIN A W buttons ND Filter ND Filter Using the ND filters allows you keep the aperture within an appropriate range when recording in bright surroundings Closing down th
167. ensor The camera is equipped with a Super 835mm CMOS sensor that captures video at an effective pixel count of 8 85 megapixels 4096x2160 and offers a center resolution of 1 800 TV lines Furthermore thanks to Canon s high sensitivity and low noise technology the camera can record at an ISO level of 20 0002 a level of sensitivity that must be seen to be believed 1 Varies depending on the lens used You can extend the ISO level to 80 000 Interchangeable lenses Enjoy the freedom of using interchangeable lenses to achieve exactly the look you want The EOS C500 features an EF lens mount allowing you to use over 60 high quality lenses from the Canon Cinema Lens series and EF Lens series The EOS C500 PL features a PL lens mount allowing you to use a vast array of cinematography lenses compatible with a Canon PL lens mount and other lenses commonly used in motion picture production 4K 2K and MXF modes In 4K and 2K modes the camera outputs image data for recording with an external recorder In 4K mode the camera outputs Canon RAW image data which is free of compression noise In 2K mode the camera outputs up to an RGB 4 4 4 12 bit signal In MXF mode the camera records HD audio and video to CompactFlash CF cards HD recordings are saved as Material eXchange Format MXF files and are compatible with major non linear editing NLE software For example you can use these MXF files as proxy video for your NLE software Furthe
168. eo Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate Before you shoot select the type of recording resolution frame size frame rate and other settings that best match your creative needs The options available will depend on whether the camera is in 4K mode 2K mode or MXF mode as well as the system frequency setting Selecting the Video Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes To set the video configuration select the system frequency system priority recording mode resolution and frame rate as necessary For a summary of the video configuration refer to the table following the procedures below Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K Selecting the System Priority When you select the system priority you can have the camera output 4K or 2K image data 1 Open the System Priority submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup amp System Priority 2 Select 4K or 2K and then press SET e The camera will switch to the selected mode If the camera was in MXF mode it will restart in the selected mode Selecting the System Frequency 1 Open the System Frequency submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 System Frequency 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e The camera will restart in the selected mode e n this manual recordings with a system frequency of 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz and 24 00 Hz are referred to as 59 94 Hz recordings 50 00 Hz recordings and
169. eo equipment we recommend Canon brand accessories or products bearing the same mark Specifications Specifications C500 C500 PL System 20 e Video Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes _ 4K mode Mode RAW HRAW 4K1K RAW both 10 bit Resolution 4096x2160 3840x2160 4096x1080 3840x1080 Frame rate 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P 50 00P 25 00P 24 00P 2K mode Mode RGB 4 4 4 12 bit RGB 4 4 4 10 bit YCC 4 2 2 10 bit Hesolution 2048x1080 1920x1080 Frame rate 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P 50 00P 25 00P 24 00P Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings Recording System Movies Video compression MPEG 2 Long GOP Audio compression Linear PCM 16 bits 48 kHz 2 channels File type MXF Photos DCF Design rule for Camera File system compatible with Exif Ver 2 3 JPEG compression Video Configuration MXF recording playback 50 Mbps CBR 4 2 2 422P HL 1920x1080 59 94i 50 00i 29 97P 25 00P 24 00P 23 98P 1280x720 59 94P 50 00P 29 97P 25 00P 24 00P 23 98P 35 Mbps VBR 4 2 0 MP HL 1920x1080 59 94i 50 00 29 97P 25 00P 23 98P 1280x720 59 94P 50 00P 29 97P 25 00P 23 98P 25 Mbps CBR 4 2 0 MP H14 1440x1080 59 94i 50 00i 29 97P 25 00P 23 98P Recording Media not included Movies CompactFlash CF Card Type two slots Photos SD or SDHC SD High Capacity memory card Custom picture files camera settings and user memo files can be saved on and rea
170. ept for clips with an mark on the selected CF Delete All Clips card will be deleted e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the clips are being deleted you can press SET to cancel 3 When the confirmation message appears press SET Deleting the User Memo 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Delete User Memo and then press SET e The Delete User Memo screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 3 Select OK and then press SET e he user memo and GPS information is deleted and the screen changes back to the clip index screen e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a Clip You can copy the custom picture file embedded in a clip to the camera 1 Select the desired clip a clip with the icon and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Copy File and then press SET MXF Clip Operations e The 2 Data 1 3 screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a custom picture file slot in the camera e Alternatively you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button e You can push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to display the fa Data 2 3 and J Data 3 3 screens 137 3 Push the joystick left right to select the desired file slot and then press SET 4 Select OK and then press SET e The custom picture file already in the selected file slot will be overwritten e Select
171. er also to the instruction manual of the lens used imeortant e When attaching removing a lens avoid direct sunlight or strong light sources Also be careful not to drop the camera or lens 1 NOTES e Be careful not to touch the lens mount or any components inside the lens mount area e Replace the body cap to the lens mount immediately after removing the lens from the camera e Keep the body cap clean and free from dust or dirt particles Attaching an EF Lens 1 Set the switch to OFF 2 Turn the mount handle clockwise until it stops S 3 Remove the body cap from the camera and any dust caps from the lens 4 Align the lens and mount making sure that the index marks are aligned e EF lenses Align the red mark on the lens with the red EF Lens mount index mark on the camera e EF S lenses Align the white mark on the lens with the white EF S Lens mount index mark on the camera NN RA o o e 4 o After the lens is attached to the camera without turning the lens turn the mount handle counter clockwise until it is tightened firmly 1 NOTES e Turning on the image stabilization function of an EF lens may reduce the effective usage time of the battery pack When image stabilization is not necessary for example if the camera is fixed to a tripod it is recommended to turn it off Depending on the lens used you may experience one or more of the following limitations The lens model name may be shortened when d
172. er you finish playing back a clip from this index screen the index screen that was open before the Expand Clip index screen will appear Adding Shot Marks You can add shot marks El El or both to shots in a clip you want to set apart Later you can display an index screen that shows only the clips with a E mark only the clips with a B mark or only clips with either shot mark Adding Shot Marks during Playback To add an El mark or El mark to a clip during playback or playback pause you must first set an assignable button to Add Shot Mark 1 or Add Shot Mark 2 in advance 1 Set an assignable button to Add Shot Mark 1 or Add Shot Mark 2 1 111 2 During playback or playback pause press the assignable button at the point in the clip to add the shot mark e A message indicating the shot mark appears on the screen and the shot mark is added to the clip e Adding a shot mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback Adding Shot Marks from the Index Screen 1 Open the Shot Mark index screen or Expand Clip index screen 2 Select the desired frame thumbnail and then press SET to open the clip menu MXF Clip Operations 3 Select Add Shot Mark 1 or Add Shot Mark 2 and then press SET e The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation 4 Select OK and then press SET e The screen changes back to the previous index screen and the selected shot mark appears next to the 139 selecte
173. erating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF Selecting the Running Mode 00 00 TC UB Setup During MXF mode you can select the running mode of the camera s time code During 4K and 2K modes the running mode will be set to Free Run during normal shooting and slow amp fast recording mode it will be set to Rec Run during interval recording and frame recording modes You can set the time code s initial value however by performing the procedure Mode in the following section Setting the Time Codes Initial Value Time Code Preset 1 Open the time code Mode submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 3 Mode 2 Select the desired option and then press SET 00 00 TC UB Setup e f you selected Regen you do not need to perform the rest of this procedure If you selected Preset and would like to set the time Time Code codes initial value see the following section Setting the Time Codes Initial Value Run 3 After you select Preset open the time code Run submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 3 Run Free Run 4 Select the desired option and then press SET Options Preset The time code starts from an initial value you can select in advance The default initial time code is 00 00 00 00 The time code s running mode depends on the Run setting Rec Run The time code runs only while recording so clips recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time codes F
174. erminals only Not available when MI Camera Setup amp Color Space is set to BT 2020 Video Output Using ACESproxy10 for On set Color Grading You can have the camera convert the video from the MON 2 terminal to ACESproxy10 compliant video and output it By checking the results with a compatible display device you can see post production video while on set 1 Open the ACESPX10 submenu 4K AK 2K MXF 3 MON 1 amp 2 9 ACESPX10 Connecting to an External Monitor 2 Select MON 2 and then press SET e The video output from the MON 2 terminal will be ACESproxy10 compliant e Because this setting takes priority the 4 4K 2K MXF 3 MON 1 amp 2 3 LUT setting will not be available 149 Using the HD SD SDI Terminal The digital signal output from the HD SD SDI terminal includes the video signal audio signal and time code signal If necessary perform the 4k AK 2K MXF Setup following procedure to change the output to HD or SD Turning the HD SD SDI output off will conserve the camera s power Not available for 24 00 Hz recordings Output Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA p g HD 1 Open the Output submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup in camera mode or z Video Setup in v amp ei mode 3 HD SD SDI 3 Output 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e f you selected SD you can select the SD resizing method Q4 150 e f necessary adjust the scan mod
175. ettings phase chroma area and Y level LD 121 Area B revision settings level and phase LD 121 Setup level and press LZ 122 Clip at 10096 LL 122 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If you have a problem with your camera refer to this section Consult a Canon Service Center if the problem persists 185 Power source The camera will not turn on or it turns off by itself The battery pack is exhausted Replace or charge the battery pack Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly Shortly after turning it on the camera turns off on its own You are using a DC coupler or a battery pack that is not compatible for use with this camera Use a recommended battery pack LZ 199 Cannot charge the battery pack The temperature of the battery pack is outside the charging range If the battery pack s temperature is below 0 C 32 F warm it before charging it if it is above 40 C 104 F let the battery pack cool down before charging it Charge the battery pack in temperatures between 0 C and 40 C 32 F and 104 F The battery pack is faulty Replace the battery pack The battery pack is exhausted extremely quickly even at normal temperatures Check the Battery Hour Meter status screen J 183 to see whether the battery pack is at the end of its service life If so buy a new battery pack Recording The camera s controls are not responsive disabled The plug being connected
176. evious index screen appears next to the thumbnail of the selected frame e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation 1 NOTES e When playing back a clip from the clip index screen playback will start from the beginning of the clip regardless of the thumbnail MXF Clip Operations 140 eee AN External Connections 141 Video Output Configuration The video signal output from the MON terminals HD SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal depends on the clip s video configuration the capability of the external monitor for video output from the HDMI OUT terminal and on various menu settings The HD SD SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal are able to output the onscreen displays and superimpose them on the picture of an external monitor LJ 151 Video Configuration and Video Output Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes Refer to the following tables for the video configuration for recording video configuration recorded on the CF card and video output configuration from each terminal during 4K and 2K modes Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K Video configuration HD SD SDI for recording MON terminal gt 6 i terminals 3 Sell Beco ly Resolution Frame rate HD SD priority mode 1080 29 97PsF 59 94P 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97 PPSF cog 29 97P 1080 29 97 P PsF id 4096x2160 23 98P 1080 23 98 P PsF 1080 23 98 P PsF 3840x2160 1
177. explanation of the problem During the ONE YEAR warranty period repairs will be made and the Products will be return shipped to you free of charge For repairs after the warranty period is over you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred If you approve repairs will be made and the Products will be returned to you at your risk and expense If you disapprove we will return ship the Products to you at no charge to you to an address within Canada This limited warranty only applies if the Products are used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software as to which items Canon Canada will have no responsibility Canon Canada shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the Products in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and or incompatible software Non Canon brand peripheral equipment and software which may be distributed with or factory loaded on the Products are sold AS IS without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada including any implied warranty or condition regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose The sole warranty with respect to such non Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof Except for the battery pack packaged with the Products which carries a separate ninety 90 day limited warranty In order to obtain warranty service
178. eye cup as shown in the illustration Dioptric Adjustment mE Dioptric Turn on the camera and adjust the dioptric adjustment dial adjustment Preparing the Camera Attaching the Viewfinder Cap Pointing the viewfinder lens at the sun or other strong light sources may cause damage to internal components When you are not using the viewfinder make sure to attach the viewfinder cap to the viewfinder This will also protect the viewfinder from scratches and dirt Attach the viewfinder cap by inserting it into the rubber portion of the viewfinder unit Using the LCD Panel The whole monitor unit can be rotated 270 sideways allowing for easy monitoring and operation from the side of the camera Additionally the independently articulated LCD panel can be rotated 180 sideways and 270 up and down In combination you can position the LCD panel at a comfortable angle whatever the shooting style you need 1 Rotate the monitor unit sideways to the desired angle 2 Open the LCD panel and adjust the screen to the desired position Adjusting the LCD Panel for Shoulder Mounted Use 1 Open the LCD panel 90 until it is perpendicular to the monitor unit 2 Rotate the LCD panel 180 left 3 Rotate the LCD panel 180 forward 4 Press the MIRROR button until the image is displayed in the correct orientation e Repeatedly pressing the MIRROR button will change the displayed image in the following order Image inverted horizontally gt
179. g modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF 1 Open the ABB screen DIR Camera Setup PAR Camera Setup 9 ABB 2 Attach the body cap to the lens mount ABB e f alens was attached remove the lens and replace the body cap 3 Select OK and then press SET e The automatic black balance procedure will start 4 When the confirmation message appears press SET e f the body cap is not correctly attached Error will appear on the screen Press SET and repeat the procedure from the beginning 1 NOTES e Adjusting the black balance may be necessary in the following cases When using the camera for the very first time or after a long period of not using it After sudden or extreme changes in ambient temperature After changing the ISO speed gain settings e The automatic black balance procedure will take approximately 40 seconds when the frame rate is set to 23 98P or 24 00P e During the adjustment of the black balance you may notice some irregular displays appear on the screen This is not a malfunction e Resetting the camera s settings using the f Other Functions Reset 9 All Settings or Camera Settings menu option will reset also the black balance adjustment In such case perform the procedure again Operating the Camera Remotely Operating the Camera Remotely There are two methods in which the camera can be operated remotely The first is to connect the optional RC V100 Remote Controller to the camera
180. gh available space on the CF card Delete some clips Q 136 to free some space or replace the CF card A system error has occurred Turn off the camera and back on again If this does not solve the problem consult a Canon Service Center The tally lamp flashes slowly 0 e 1 flash per second The combined available space on both CF cards is low Replace the CF card that is not being recorded onto or BJ appears in red on the screen There is not enough available space on the CF card Delete some clips QA 136 to free some space or replace the CF card s appears in red on the screen An SD card error occurred Turn off the camera Remove and reinsert the SD card Initialize the SD card if the display does not change back to normal The SD card is full Replace the SD card or delete some photos 162 to free some space on the SD card Even after stopping recording the CF CF BJ access indicator stays illuminated in red The clip is being recorded This is not a malfunction EJ appears in yellow on the screen The camera s internal temperature has reached a predetermined level You can continue using the camera Troubleshooting EJ appears in red on the screen The camera s internal temperature has risen while Ed appeared in yellow on the screen f Other Functions 3 Fan is set to On turn off the camera and wait until the temperature has lowered In camera
181. guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Heorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Canon U S A Inc One Canon Park Melville NY 11747 USA Tel No 1 800 OK CANON 1 800 652 2666 The Mains plug is used as the disconnect device The Mains plug shall remain readily operable to disconnect the plug in case of an accident CAUTION e Danger of explosion if the wrong type of batteries are attached Use only the same type of batteries e Do not expose batteries or product to excessive heat such as the inside of a car under direct sunlight fire etc EOS C500 EOS C500 PL CA 940N CG 940
182. h a frame rate of 29 97P 59 94i or 59 94P you can also select between a drop frame and non drop frame time code To synchronize the camera s time code to an external time code generator refer to Synchronizing with an External Device A 88 Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA AK 2K MXF Selecting the Running Mode During MXF mode you can select the running mode of the cameras time code During 4K and 2K modes the running mode will be set to Free Run during normal shooting and slow amp fast recording mode it will be set to Rec Run during interval recording and frame recording modes You can set the time codes initial value however by performing the procedure in the following section Setting the Time Codes Initial Value 1 Onen the time code Model submenu _ 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 3 Mode 2 Select the desired option and then press SEI If you selected Regen you do not need to perform the rest of this procedure If you selected Preset and would like to set the time codes initial value see the following section Setting the Time Codes Initial Value 3 After you select Preset open the time code Run submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 3 Run 4 Select the desired option and then press SET Options Preset The time code starts from an initial value you can select in advance The default initial time code is 00 00 00 00 The time code s running mode depends on the Run setting
183. harger 2 Plug the power cord into a power outlet 3 Attach the battery pack to the battery charger e Press lightly and slide the battery pack in the direction of the arrow until it clicks e The CHARGE indicator starts flashing and also indicates the battery pack s approximate charge The indicator will stay on when charging has completed ceo indicator Leges 0 3496 Flashes once per second ek ek 395 6996 Flashes twice per second Geek 3eek 70 9996 Flashes 3 times per second 4 When charging has completed remove the battery pack from the battery charger 5 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect it from the battery charger imeortant e Do not connect to the battery charger any product that is not expressly recommended for use with this camera 1 NOTES e We recommend charging the battery pack in temperatures between 10 C and 30 C 50 F and 86 F Outside the temperature range of O C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F charging will not start e f there is a malfunction with the battery charger or battery pack the CHARGE indicator will go out and charging will stop e For handling precautions regarding the battery pack refer to Battery Pack LL 192 e Charged battery packs continue to discharge naturally Therefore charge them on the day of use or the day before to ensure a full charge e We recommend that you prepare battery packs to last 2 to 3 times longer than you
184. he Media status screen Q4 181 you can check the total space and used space of each recording media as well as the available recording time on each CF card and the available number of photos on the SD card The approximate available recording time is based on the current bit rate A 60 Recovering Data on the CF Card Some actions such as suddenly turning off the camera or removing the CF card while data is being recorded can cause data errors on the CF card In such case you may be able to recover the data on the CF card Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA AK 2K MXF 1 Insert the CF card with the data to be recovered into the camera 2 When the screen prompts you to recover the data select OK and then press SET 3 When the confirmation message appears press SET 1 NOTES e his procedure will delete clips shorter than 10 seconds in length Additionally up to 10 seconds will be deleted from the end of clips on the CF card e n some cases data may not be recovered such as when the FAT32 file system is corrupted or the CF card is physically damaged e While recording on a CF card you can recover data from another CF card by inserting it into the other CF card slot 48 Adjusting the Black Balance Adjusting the Black Balance You can have the camera adjust the black balance automatically when ambient temperature changes considerably or if there is a noticeable change in a true black video signal Operatin
185. he Lens 32 Attaching and Removing the Monitor Unit 35 Using the Viewfinder 36 Using the LCD Panel 37 Adjusting the Viewfinder LCD Screen 38 Using a Tripod 38 Attaching the Handle Unit 39 Attaching a Shoulder Strap 39 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers 40 Connecting to a 4K or 2K Compatible External Recorder 41 Preparing Recording Media 43 Inserting a CF Card 43 Checking the Status of the CF Card Slots 44 Removing a CF card 44 Inserting and Removing an SD Card 44 Initializing the Recording Media 45 Switching Between the CF Card Slots 46 Selecting the CF Card Recording Method 46 Checking the Available Recording Time for CF Cards 47 Recovering Data on the CF Card 47 Adjusting the Black Balance 48 Operating the Camera Remotely 49 Using the RC V100 Remote Controller 49 Hemote Operation Via the Wi Fi Remote Application 50 Preparing the System for Wi Fi Remote 50 3 Recording 51 Recording Video 51 Preparing to Record 51 Recording 51 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 54 Onscreen Displays 55 Rear Panel Displays 57 Canon Log Gamma and CINEMA Preset 58 Checking Clips Recorded with Canon Log Gamma View Assistance 58 Using the Internal Cooling Fan 59 Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate 60 Selecting the Video Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes 60 Selecting the Video Configuration for MXF Mode 64 Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC Button 66 Using the Direct Setting Mode 66 Shutter Spee
186. he desired shooting frame rate and then press SET Available shooting frame rates depend on other video configuration 24 settings in use Available Shooting Frame Rates Video configuration Shooting frame rate SYSETIDUOY System Recording mode fps in 1 fps unless otherwise noted frequency Vertical resolution RAW 1 to 30 uU 12 bit 9 2t 2f t 59 94 Hz EY 10 bit 32 to 60 in 2 fps increments 24 00 Hz We i 1060 62 to 120 in 2 fps increments 4K YCCA22 meu 2K RAW 1 to 25 uero 12 bit 9 26 to 50 in 2 fps increments CIT 10 bit 50 00 Hz repay HRAW 1 to 50 YCCA22 52 to 100 in 2 fps increments 59 94 Hz 1080 1 to 30 24 00 Hz 720 1 to 60 MXF 1080 1 to 25 50 00 Hz 720 1 to 50 The recording mode cannot be set to HRAW 4K1K RAW or YCC422 for this system frequency This range is in 2 fps increments When the shooting frame rate appears in brackets on the screen this indicates that both 3G SDI terminals are required for output Activating Slow amp Fast Motion Mode and Recording 1 Open the Special Rec submenu 2K 4K 2K MXF Setup 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 3 Special Rec 2 Select Slow amp Fast Motion and then press SET e S amp F STBY during 4K and 2K modes or S amp F STBY during MXF mode appears at the top of the screen e The selected shooting frame rate appears on the right of the screen next to the frame rate setting the playback frame rate Special Re
187. he preset files C8 CINEMA Uses the Canon Log gamma and color matrix for an outstanding dynamic range and an 115 image suitable for processing in post production mE C9 EOS Std Reproduces the image quality and look high contrast vibrant colors of an EOS digital SLR camera with its picture style set to Standard Editing a Custom Picture File s Settings 1 After selecting a file select 2 Edit File and then press SET 2 Select a setting and then press SET 3 Change the setting to the desired level and then press SET e Refer to Available Custom Picture Settings LL 117 for details on the various settings e Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings as necessary e The new custom picture settings will be applied camera or SD card and the custom picture file s number will appear on the left of the screen Resetting the current file s settings to default values 1 Select Reset and then press SET 2 Select the default values and then press SET e Select NEUTRAL to reset to neutral default values equivalent to not using custom picture settings at all or CINEMA or EOS Std if you want to replicate these preset settings for example as a starting point to edit them further 3 Select OK and then press SET Renaming Custom Picture Files amp Edit File 1 After selecting a file open the Rename submenu S Edit File amp Rename e A screen appears that displays the current file name with an orange se
188. he slope of the gamma curve above the knee point This setting can be adjusted from 35 to 50 Default 0 Point Sets the knee point of the gamma curve This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 109 Default 95 Saturation Adjusts color saturation in highlights This setting can be adjusted from 10 to 10 Default 0 Knee Slope Knee Point 3 3 Lo X a 6 Input Input Sharpness Sets the sharpness of the output and recording signal Level Sets the sharpness level This setting can be adjusted from 10 to 50 Default 0 H Detail Freq Sets the center frequency of horizontal sharpness Setting higher values increases the frequenoy which in turn increases the sharpness This setting can be adjusted from 8 to 8 Default 0 Coring Heduces noise artifacts caused by high sharpness levels Level Sets the coring level Higher values prevent sharpness from being applied to minute details resulting in less noise This setting can be adjusted from 30 to 50 Default 0 D Ofst You can use D Ofst D Curve and D Depth to adjust the coring level based on brightness D Ofst sets the coring level of the minimum brightness level This setting can be adjusted from O to 50 Default O D Curve Sets the curve of the coring adjustment This curve is the change from Level to D Ofst This setting can be adjusted from O to 8 Default O D Depth Sets a multiplier to D Ofst that determines the coring
189. hen set to On Genlock Displays the Genlock synchronization icon M when set to On Time Code Displays the time code when set to On Interval Counter Displays the countdown during interval recording mode when set to On SD Card Status Controls when the SD card status indicator appears Warning Appears only when there is a warning Normal Always appears on the screen Temperature Fan Displays the temperature warning icon Eg and the cooling fan icon ED when set to On The temperature warning icon indicates that the camera s internal temperature has become high 4K 2K Mode Displays the recording mode onscreen display for 4K mode RAW or HRAW or 2K mode eZ or ey plus bit depth when set to On 174 Menu Options Bit Rate Displays the bit rate when set to On Resolution Displays the resolution when set to On Frame Rate Displays the frame rate when set to On Character Rec Displays the character recording warning icon WAW when set to On indicating that the onscreen displays will be recorded on the clip Output Display Displays the output display warning icon DISP when set to On indicating that the onscreen displays will be output to an external monitor Rec Command Displays the status of the recording command that is being output when 3 4K 2K MXF Setup 9 Rec Command is set to On User Memo Displays the user memo icon MM when set to O
190. ilable microphones with a cable no longer than 3 m Follow the procedure below to attach a microphone refer also to the following illustration To connect an external device to the camera plug the device s cable into the camera s XLR terminal 4 1 Loosen the microphone lock screw 1 open the microphone holder and insert the microphone 2 2 Tighten the lock screw and put the microphone cable through the microphone cable clamp under the microphone holder 3 3 Plug the microphone cable into the desired XLR terminal or the MIC terminal 5 4 XLR terminals COeEEEEGUUE Cable clamp Cra Seid S pC Jap V rr AS Microphone lock screw id BAI 1 NOTES e Be careful not to pass the microphone cable in front of the cooling fan s air vents Failure to do so may cause audio noise to be recorded Recording Audio Selecting the Audio Input from the XLR Terminals Using the XLR terminals CH1 and CH2 you can record audio independently to the two audio channels from a microphone or analog audio input source Note that the camera s MIC terminal is given priority over the XLR terminals To record audio from the XLR terminals be sure not to connect any microphones to the MIC terminal 93 owitching Between Microphone and Line Input CH1 CH2 Set the XLR terminal switch of the desired channel to LINE or MIC e To supply a microphone with phantom power set the switch to MIC 48V ins
191. ile s settings will be applied camera or SD card and the custom picture file s number will appear on the left of the screen 1 NOTES e About changing custom picture related settings using the optional RC V100 Remote Controller lf a protected custom picture file or no custom picture file is selected on the camera SET Select File is set to Off custom picture related settings cannot be changed using the remote controller While the remote controller is connected to the camera custom picture files on the SD card SD1 to SD20 cannot be used If you connect the remote controller while a custom picture file on the SD card was selected the custom picture file will change automatically to Off recording without custom picture settings To use the settings of a custom picture file saved on the SD card copy the file in advance from the SD card to an open file slot in the camera Q 116 Adjusting custom picture related settings using the remote controller will change the settings registered under the currently selected custom picture file If you want to keep an important custom picture file copy it in advance to the SD card or select in advance a custom picture file you do not mind changing Custom Picture Settings Preset Custom Picture Files By default the custom picture files in file slots C8 and C9 in the camera are protected Remove the protection QJ 115 to edit the file The following describes when to use t
192. ion This is done through the clip menu which contains different functions depending on the index screen You can use the functions in the v Other Functions menu to perform some of the operations on all the clips Refer to the following table for available functions and refer to the following pages for more details of the functions 132 Operating modes MEDIA Clip Menu Functions Index screen Menu item Description Eg Mark Shot Mark A M Mark Expand Clip Display Clip Info Displays various information about a clip o o 133 Add fd Mark 2 Delete Ry Mark Adds or deletes an I mark o e 134 Add M Mark 3 Delete Wa Mark Adds or deletes a MA mark o o 134 Copy Clip Copies a clip from one CF card to the other o e 135 Delete Clip Deletes a clip o 136 Shot Mark Displays an index screen of all the frames of a clip that e e E 137 have either shot mark Shot Mark 1 Displays an index screen of all the frames of a clip that e e E 137 have the B mark Shot Mark 2 Displays an index screen of all the frames of a clip that e e E 137 have the E mark Expand Clip Displays an index screen that shows frames of a clip at e e B 138 a fixed interval Delete User Memo Deletes the user memo and GPS information of a clip o e 136 Copy sg File Copies the custom picture file from a clip to the camera o e 136 Add Shot Mark 1 Del
193. ired option and the press SET Options Photo Operations Other Functions Photo Numbering 165 Continu Reset Photo numbers will restart from 101 0101 every time you insert a new SD card If an SD card already contains photos photo numbers will continue from the number following that of the last photo on the SD card Continu Photo numbers will continue from the number following that of the last photo recorded with the camera i NOTES e f you select Continu and the SD card you insert already contains a photo with a larger number a new photo will be assigned a number one higher than that of the last photo on the SD card e We recommend using the Continu setting Photo Operations 166 Menu Options Additional Information For details about how to select an item refer to Using the Menus 29 For details about each function see the reference page Menu items without a reference page are explained after the tables Setting options in boldface indicate default values Menu items not available appear grayed out To skip directly to the page of a specific menu PER Camera Setup menu I 167 4k AK 2K MXF Setup menu I 167 IE Video Setup menu I 170 4 Audio Setup menu T 171 LA LCD VF Setup menu TL 171 00 00 TC UB Setup menu LI 174 00 00 User Bit Setup menu LI 174 f Other Functions menu 175 xXx My Menu cus
194. irmation screen appears 2 Click Yes to begin uninstalling the software e When the software has been uninstalled The software has been successfully uninstalled appears 156 Saving MXF Clips to a Computer 3 Click OK Uninstalling the Plugins Windows 1 In the Control Panel open Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs e A list of installed programs appears 2 Select Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access or Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder 3 Click Uninstall or Uninstall Change 4 Follow the onscreen instructions Uninstalling the Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Windows 1 From the Start menu open All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Desired plugin gt Uninstall Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual or Uninstall Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual 2 When the confirmation screen appears click Yes and then click OK Installing Canon XF Utility Mac OS 1 Double click the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site to decompress it e The downloaded file is xum dmg gz for Canon XF Utility xprmm dmg gz for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access or xpfm dmg gz for Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro and Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X The rest of the explanation refers only to Canon XF Utility bu
195. is when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment EEE and batteries and accumulators Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources For more information about the recycling of this product please contact your local city office waste authority approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www canon europe com weee or www canon europe com battery Important Safety Instructions In these safety instructions the word apparatus refers to the Canon Digital Cinema Camera EOS C500 EOS C500 PL and all its accessories A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an Read these instructions electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet cj meee Wee WiSIUCHORS 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or 3 Heed all warnings pinched particularly at plugs convenience 4 Follow all instructions receptacles and the point where they exit from 5 Do not use this apparatus near water the apparatus 6 Clean only with dry cloth 11
196. isplayed on the screen You may not be able to focus manually when the focus mode switch is set to AF You may not be able to use the focus preset function on super telephoto lenses You cannot use the power zoom function on lenses with that function Removing an EF Lens 1 Set the switch to OFF 2 While holding the bottom of the lens turn the mount handle clockwise until it stops e Make sure not to drop the lens when removing it 3 Replace the body cap to the camera and the dust cap to the lens Preparing the Camera Index mark 33 34 Preparing the Camera Changing a Lens While Maintaining the Time Code s Progress You can change the lens while the camera is turned on and the time code is running Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF flash twice every 2 seconds During this time the time code will continue running e While the camera is in lens exchange mode only the switch and LENS EXCHANGE button can be operated Also the LCD screen will turn off and output from the video terminals will be put on hold 2 Remove the lens attached to the camera and attach the new lens e Do not set the switch to OFF 3 Press the LENS EXCHANGE button again e The camera exits lens exchange mode e Opening the CF card slot cover or removing the SD card will also exit lens exchange mode et Peripheral Illumination Correction Depending on the characteristics of the lens used the image around the corners of th
197. justing picture related settings with the remote controller can be performed only after a custom picture file is selected 1 114 o0 Operating the Camera Remotely Remote Operation Via the Wi Fi Remote Application You can attach an optional WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camera and operate the camera remotely via Wi Fi Remote a Web browser application that can be accessed using the Web browser on any device compatible with Wi Fi networks The Wi Fi Remote application lets you monitor the image through live view start and stop recording and remotely control the shutter speed ISO speed gain and other settings You can also create edit and transfer a metadata profile set various shot marks and check the recording media remaining recording time time code etc For details about compatible devices operating systems Web browsers etc please visit your local Canon Web site Operating modes CAMERA 4K JC 2K MxF Preparing the System for Wi Fi Remote To be able to operate the camera remotely via the Wi Fi Remote application you will need to attach an optional WFTI E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camera s WEFT terminal and complete the wireless network setup Download WFI E6 Wireless File Transmitter Guide for Canon Camcorders PDF file from your local Canon Web site and follow the instructions to complete the necessary setup Recording Recording Video This section explains the
198. kavango Delta Description 1 User memo file name LQ 97 4 2 Clip title 5 3 Camera operator Metadata 2 2 Status Screen cavea mode only Metadata 2 2 1 EME Country Code 2 Organization User Code 1 Country code Q 170 2 Organization code Letterbox UUU 8 HD SD onscreen displays LL 151 SD output resizing method LZ 150 MXF clip bit rate resolution LL 64 MXF clip frame rate Q 65 MXF clip resizing method LL 63 Filming location Clip description 3 User code Battery Hour Meter Status Screen Battery Hour Meter Remaining Battery 0 Displaying the Status Screens 183 50 Battery Life OOO Maximum Hour Meter Total Since Reset Remaining recording time Remaining battery level indicator Battery life indicator 4 Total operation time LL 177 5 Operation time since using Reset Hour Meter Q 177 f Data 1 3 Status Screen cavers mode only O AOON Data 1 3 CP000003 Normal 1 MP 0 R 0 Lvl 0 On Off Custom picture file name LL 114 Gamma LL 117 Master pedestal LL 118 Master black RGB levels LL 118 Black gamma settings level range and point LL 118 12 145 Low Key Satur Off Lvl 0 G 0 B 0 Range 0 Point 0 Sip 0 P 95 Sat 0 H 0 C16 A16 Y16 H 0 C16 A 16 Y 16 6 Knee settings slope point and saturation Q 119 Skin detail settings hue chroma area and Y level L
199. le L LCD VF Setup onscreen markers simultaneously Markers 1 Open the Markers submenu LA LCD VF Setup 3 Markers Center 2 Select a marker you wish to display select White or Gray and iris 2 then press SET uer ns e Select Off to turn off the selected marker Aspect Marker e You can display multiple markers simultaneously Repeat this step as b necessary Off e f you selected Safety Zone or Aspect Marker continue to step 3 Otherwise you can skip to step 4 3 Select Safety Zone Area or Aspect Ratio select the desired option and then press SET 4 Select Enable select On and then press SET to enable the onscreen markers e All of the selected onscreen markers will be displayed e Select Off to turn off all onscreen markers Options Center Displays a small marker that indicates the center of the screen Horizontal Displays a horizontal line to help you compose level shots Grid Displays a grid that allows you to frame your shots correctly horizontally and vertically Safety Zone Displays indicators that show various safe areas such as the action safe area and text safe area Available options for Safety Zone Area are 80 90 92 5 and 95 Aspect Marker Displays markers that indicate various aspect ratios to help you keep your shot within that area Available options for Aspect Ratio are 2 35 1 1 85 1 1 75 1 1 66 1 14 9 13 9 and 4 3 Safety
200. lect the desired value and then press SET For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode LL 66 Normal ISO Speed Gain 1 NOTES e f you set an assignable button to FUNC ISO Gain LL 111 you can press the button to enter the direct setting mode with the ISO speed gain highlighted and ready to be adjusted 1 Using the Control Dial You can adjust the value of the ISO speed or gain using the control dial on the camera When you have attached the grip unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 to the camera you can select the function assigned to each control dial independently You will need to set the control dial s function to ISO Gain in advance Assigning ISO Speed Gain Control to the Control Dial 1 Open the Control Dial submenu f Other Functions 39 Custom Function 9 Control Dial When you are assigning the function to the control dial on the grip unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 select Grip Ctrl Dial instead 2 Select ISO Gain and then press SET Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value To select whether to change the ISO speed or the gain perform steps 1 to 4 in the previous procedure Turn the control dial to set the desired ISO speed f Other Functions or gain value Gi NOTES Custom Function e You can use the f Other Functions 9 Custom Function 3 Control Dial Dir or Grip Dial Dir setting QA 123 to change the direction of the Control Dial adjustment wh
201. lection frame on the first character Rename 2 Select an alphanumeric character or symbol then move to the next field e Change the rest of the name in the same way 3 Select Set and then press SET 4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu Protecting Custom Picture Files amp Edit File Protecting a custom picture file prevents its settings from being accidentally changed J Protect 116 Custom Picture Settings 1 After selecting a file open the Protect submenu Edit File 3 Protect 2 Select Protect and then press SET e n the custom picture menu le will appear next to the file name e To remove protection settings select Unprotect instead 3 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu Transferring Custom Picture Files You can transfer custom picture files between the camera and SD card When the selected custom picture file is in the camera use Copy To s or Load From s2 depending on the operation you wish to perform Similarly when the selected custom picture file is on an SD card use Copy To Cam or Load From Cam Copying a File from the Camera to an SD Card El Transfer File 1 After selecting a file in the camera open the Copy To s submenu Transfer File amp 9 Copy To I Copy To E 2 Select the file slot on the SD card under which to save the file and then press SET e f there are availabl
202. leere 104 RGB 4 4 4 QW es 60 Running mode time code sss 84 S oafety ZONE sosiwerri y e Rd RO ORO a 82 Saving MXF clips to a computer 155 OE CaN MMTTP E 44 Shooting frame rate 6 cles 108 Shot markS 05 2c00ndwaehews o amp aude d 102 138 Shutter speed 2 ee eee 67 Slow amp fast motion recording mode 108 SpecificationS eee 201 E only only Status screens 1 es 178 SYNC OUT terminal lues 90 150 Synchronization ex x bsc d bici sacas 88 System frequency llle 64 System priority iiie s 60 64 T Taly AMO Cm 175 Terminal covers leen 40 Time code oid ocd ek cowl ye wag ee aed a as 84 TIME CODE terminal 89 91 loo rw 38 Troubleshooting 2s douce dic tad daded 185 Turning the camera on off lll 26 U User bit ec nnns up 7 User memo 2 cee ec Gh 97 V Vectorscope ose oun 101 Video configuration WW A23 60 Video output configuration ls 141 View assistance ee ee 58 Viewfinder 25244424 84 heed eewe eek oo eeens 38 W Waveform monitor serene 100 WFT terminal auis ecd DR s 49 50 White balance es 76 Wade DR susce 63 264 RC aS ruk rra EON RH 169 Wi Fi Remote 0 000 ee ae 49 50 X XLR terminals acude deb 0 dea ES DER ch ES 92 Y YCC 4 2 2 90 ee eee 60 Z Zebra pattern 2 es 83 210 CAN
203. level adjustment based on brightness Positive values raise the coring level in dark areas and negative values lower the level This setting can be adjusted from 4 to 4 Default 0 HV Detail Bal Adjusts the ratio between horizontal and vertical detail Higher values emphasize vertical detail while lower values emphasize horizontal detail This setting can be adjusted from 8 to 8 Default 0 Limit Hestricts how much sharpness is applied This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 120 Custom Picture Settings Select In addition to the sharpness set by Level Select sets the sharoness for areas with higher frequencies Higher values apply more sharpness to areas with higher frequencies Use this for subjects in which normal sharpening is not effective This setting is not available when the video configuration is 720P This setting can be adjusted from O to 15 Default O Knee Aperture Allows you to set the sharpness of only the areas above the knee point by adjusting the gain and slope When Gamma is set to Cine 1 Cine 2 Canon Log or EOS Std this setting has no effect on the picture Gain Sets the amount of sharpness This setting can be adjusted from O to 9 Default O Slope Sets the slope of the sharpness This setting can be adjusted from O to 3 with O having no slope 1 having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope Default 1 Level Depend Lowers the amount of sh
204. lf or press the SET button 2 Change the rest of the fields in the same way 3 Select B Set and then press SET to start the clock and close the screen i NOTES e You can change the date format and the clock format 12 24 hours with the f Other Functions 9 Set Clock 39 Date Format setting e You can also change the date and time later on not during the initial setup with the fv Other Functions 93 Set Clock 3 Date Time setting e When the built in rechargeable lithium battery is exhausted the date and time setting may be lost In such case recharge the built in lithium battery LZ 194 and set the time zone date and time again Changing the Time Zone f Other Functions Change the time zone to match the time zone of your location The default setting is UTC 05 00 New York or UTC 01 00 Central Europe Time Zone depending on the country region of purchase The time zones are based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC 05 00 New York Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MxF IUTC 01 00 Central Europe 1 Press the MENU button Depending on the country region of purchase 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select f Other Functions 3 Select Time Zone in a similar fashion 4 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to change the time zone 5 Press SET to set the time zone and then press the MENU button to close the menu 28 Date Time a
205. lling the software e When the software has been uninstalled The software has been successfully uninstalled appears 3 Click OK Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development Mac OS Installing Cinema RAW Development 1 Double click crdm dmg gz the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site to decompress it e The file crdm dmg will be created 2 Double click crdm dmg e The crdm icon will appear on the desktop 3 Double click crdm and then double click CRDInstaller 4 Select your area 5 Select your country region and then click Next 6 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications exit other applications and then click OK e The softwares license agreement appears 7 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation e f you do not select Yes you cannot install the software e When the installation has completed Installation has completed successfully appears 8 Click Next and then click Finish Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development 1 From Applications open Canon Utilities 2 Move Cinema RAW Development to Trash Viewing the Software Instruction Manual For details on using the software refer to the instruction manual PDF file The instruction manual is installed with the software Windows 1 From the Start menu select All Programs Canon Utilities Cinema RAW Development Cinema RAW Development Instruction Manual 2 Select the language
206. lly diagonal lines may appear jagged Selecting the Video Configuration for MXF Mode To set the video configuration select the system frequenoy system priority bit rate and resolution and frame rate as necessary For a summary of the video configuration refer to the table following the procedures below Operating modes CAMERA MXF Selecting the System Priority 1 Open the System Priority submenu 4k AK 2K MXF Setup 93 System Priority 2 Select MXF and then press SET e The camera will restart in MXF mode Selecting the System Frequency 1 Open the System Frequency submenu 4k AK 2K MXF Setup 3 System Frequency 2 Select a desired option and then press SET e The camera will restart in the selected mode Selecting the Bit Rate and Resolution 1 Open the Bit Rate Resolution submenu to set the bit rate and resolution 4k AK 2K MXF Setup 3 MXF 3 Bit Rate Resolution 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e The selected bit rate and resolution will appear on the upper right of the screen 3K AK 2K MXF Setup System Priority 4K 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup System Frequency 59 94 Hz or 50 00 Hz Depending on the country region of purchase 3K AK 2K MXF Setup MXF Bit Rate Resolution 50 Mbps 1920x1080 Video Configuration Type of Recording Resolution and Frame Rate Selecting the Frame Rate This procedure is not necessary for 24 00 Hz recordings 2k 4
207. ment file error Cannot record Cannot record because the camera cannot write to the file control information This may occur if the files on the CF card were accessed using another device Save your clips QJ 155 and initialize the CF card LT 45 e During double slot recording both CF A and CF B will appear in the message CF A CF B Media full If either CF A or CF B appears in the message CF card A or CF card B is full so recording will not start Switch to the CF card in the other CF card slot to record If both CF A and CF B appear in the message CF card A and CF card B are full Delete some clips LT 136 to free some space or replace a CF card CF A CF B Media is almost full The amount of available space on CF card A and CF card B combined is low Replace the CF card that is not selected CF A CF B Media is not supported CF cards that are less than 512 MB or not UDMA compatible cannot be used with the camera Use a recommended CF card 1 43 CF A CF B Number of clips already at maximum The CF card selected for recording already contains the maximum number of clips 999 clips Replace the CF card or use the CF card in the other CF card slot Because both CF cards reached the maximum number of clips double slot recording is not available e During double slot recording both CF A and CF B will appear in the message CF A CF B Operation canceled The file control information is corrup
208. modes when using the interval recording frame recording or slow amp fast motion recording modes 1 NOTES e When recording MXF clips the following apply f you are recording with two CF cards and the CF card you are using becomes full while recording the clip will continue uninterrupted on the other CF card when relay recording LL 46 is activated In such case the recording will be recorded as separate clips If you record using the custom picture and metadata settings those settings will be recorded with the clip For more details refer to Custom Picture Settings LL 114 and Using Metadata LL 97 he video stream file in a clip will be split approximately every 2 GB for clips with a long recording time approximately every 1 GB during slow motion recording Even in such case playback will be continuous imPorTANT e Observe the following precautions while the CF or CF BJ access indicator is illuminated in red Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss Do not open the CF card slot cover of the CF card slot being accessed and remove the CF card Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera e Be sure to save your recordings regularly LL 155 especially after making important recordings Canon shall not be liable for any loss or corruption of data 1 NOTES e By default 2K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 Rec Command is set to On With this function when you connect the camera to another
209. move 3 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to move the setting to the desired position and then press SET Removing Menu Settings 1 Open the My Menu Delete screen X My Menu 3 Edit amp Delete 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the setting you want to remove and then press SET 3 Select OK and then press SET twice Resetting the My Menu Submenu 1 Reset all the menu settings registered to the My Menu submenu xXx My Menu 3 Edit 9 Reset All 2 Select OK and then press SET twice Using the Menus xXx My Menu Edit Delete xXx My Menu Edit Reset All 31 32 Preparing the Camera Preparing the Camera This section outlines the basic preparations for the camera such as attaching a lens and attaching the modular units to the camera monitor unit handle unit eye cup etc This section also covers how to adjust the viewfinder and LCD screen Your camera is nothing if not versatile and you can choose the configuration that best fits your needs and shooting conditions Configuration with monitor and handle for easy carrying Minimal configuration 1 NOTES e When changing the camera s configuration be careful not to obstruct in any way the cooling fan s air vents Exhaust vent Intake vent Intake vent Preparing the Lens As much as possible attach and remove the lens quickly and in a clean environment free of dust Ref
210. mpleted and the camera will exit the direct setting mode The setting is retained even if you turn off the camera White Balance If you selected one of the preset white balance settings or amp You can fine tune the preset values within a range of 9 to 9 2 Press the r4 button or push the joystick right e On the screen The adjustment value 0 will appear next to the white balance icon highlighted in orange Fi On the rear panel The adjustment value 0 will appear 3 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to change the adjustment value and then press SET e The selected adjustment value will be set and the camera will exit the direct setting mode e On the screen The selected adjustment value will appear next to the white balance icon On the rear panel The adjustment value display will disappear and the display will return to normal all displays will reappear The white balance fine tuning icon WB will appear to indicate that an adjustment has been made If you selected the color temperature setting 3 You can set the color temperature between 2 000 K and 15 000 K in 100 K increments 2 Press the r4 button or push the joystick right e On the screen The default color temperature value 5 500 K will be highlighted in orange On the rear panel The default color temperature value will appear 3 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to change the color temperature value and then press SET e The selecte
211. n indicating that a user memo will be recorded with a clip User Bit Displays the user bit when set to On Audio Output CH Displays the audio output channel when set to On Audio Level Displays the audio level indicator and if activated the audio peak limiter icon LM when set to On Wi Fi Displays the Wi Fi icon MAH when set to On Date Time Displays the date and or time Metadata Display Displays the date and time of recording and or the camera data shutter speed aperture value gain during playback of an MXF clip 00 00 TC UB Setup menu cauera mode only Menu item Submenu Setting options T Time Code Mode Preset Regen 84 Run Rec Run Free Run 84 DF NDF DF NDF 85 Setting Set Reset 85 TC In Out In Out 89 24P TC Sync XF Legacy Normal User Bit Rec Mode Internal External 89 Output Mode Fixed Pulldown 91 Type Setting Time Date 87 1 Available during MXF mode only 2 When the frame rate is a setting other than 29 97P 59 94i or 59 94P the time code is set to NDF and this setting cannot be changed 24P TC Sync Determines the frequency for time code input and output and synchronization through the GENLOCK terminal and SYNC OUT terminal tri level signal when the frame rate is set to 23 98P or 24 00P XF Legacy Synchronization mode compatible with Canon XF series camcorders
212. n Log 3G SDI z C Gamut Cinema Gamut Canon Log BT 2020 BT 2020 Canon Log BT 709 BT 709 Wide DR Wide DR BT 709 BT 709 DCI DCI Off Canon Log BT 709 BT 709 Wide DR Wide DR DCI P3 DCI P3 DCI DCI MON 1 MON 2 Off Off Canon Log BT 709 BT 709 Wide DR i Wide DR C Gamut Cinema Gamut DCI DCI Off Canon Log BT 709 BT 709 BT 2020 Wide DR BT 2020 Wide DR Off Canon Log BT 709 vide He MON 2 only DCI P3 DCI MON 2 ACES ACESproxy10 C Gamut off Refers to the LUT setting of the MON terminals LL 148 Refers to the ACESproxy10 setting of the MON 2 terminal LL 148 Connecting to an External Monitor Connecting to an External Monitor When you connect the camera to an external monitor for recording or playback use the terminal on the camera that matches the one you wish to use on the monitor Then select the video signal output configuration 146 QA 141 The camera can output video from all of the video output terminals simultaneously Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF Connection Diagram When you connect the camera to an external monitor using the SYNC OUT terminal use headphones to monitor the sound Q 96 We recommend that you power the camera from a household power outlet using the compact power adapter MON 1 terminal BNC cable commercially available SYNC OUT SYNC OUT terminal
213. n advance and you can enter manually the GPS information of your shooting location 1 Press the Metadata Input tab on the Wi Fi Remote screen 2 Press p Activate e Alternatively on the camera you can set 45 AK 2K MXF Setup 3 Metadata 99 Setting to Remote 3 Fill the necessary user memo and GPS information fields e You can press Clear to clear the information entered into each field 4 Press one of the transfer options to transfer the metadata to the camera e Metadata correctly transferred will be displayed on the Wi Fi Remote screen and the metadata will be transferred and applied to the clips on the camera 5 Press amp to close the message Options Apply from Next Adds the metadata you set in Wi Fi Remote to all clips recorded after the transfer Overwrite Prev Only available after recording a clip Adds the metadata you set in Wi Fi Remote to all clips recorded after the transfer and also to the last clip recorded overwriting any user memo that may have been recorded previously with the clip Overwrite Only available while recording a clip Adds the metadata you set in Wi Fi Remote to the clip that is being recorded overwriting any previous user memo It will also add this metadata to all clips recorded after the transfer 1 NOTES e The metadata sent to the camera from Wi Fi Remote will be lost in the following cases f the camera was turned off If the 4 4K 2K MXF Setup 93
214. n to Audio Level LL 111 you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio level indicator on and off CH1 CH2 dials Adjusting the Microphone s Sensitivity You can adjust the microphone s sensitivity if the XLR terminal switch is set to MIC or MIC 48V 1 Open the desired XLR terminal s sensitivity submenu J Audio Setup amp Audio Input 3 XLR1 Mic Trimming or XLR2 Mic Trimming 2 Select the desired level and then press SET Available Sensitivity Levels TIOE 6 dB 0 dB 6 dB 12 dB Activating the Microphone s Attenuator You can activate the microphone s attenuator 20 dB if the XLR terminal switch is set to MIC or MIC 48V 1 Open the desired XLR terminal s microphone attenuator submenu D Audio Setup amp Audio Input 3 XLR1 Mic Att or IXLR2 Mic Att 2 Select On and then press SET Adjusting the Audio Level from the MIC Terminal You can adjust the audio recording level of a microphone attached to the MIC terminal to auto or manual You can set the audio level manually within a range of O to 99 1 Open the MIC Mode submenu J Audio Setup 93 Audio Input 3 MIC Mode 2 Select Automatic or Manual and then press SET e f you selected Automatic you do not need to perform the rest of the procedure If you selected Manual continue the procedure to set the microphone s audio recording level 3 Open the MIC Level submenu 4 Audio Setu
215. n use that camera in that same exact way 125 Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card 1 Open the Save To s submenu Other Functions 9 Transfer Menu M 9 Save To f2 2 Select Menu or Menu 2 and then press SET e Selecting Menu will save menu settings and Menu 8 will save Save To s2 menu and custom picture settings 3 Select OK and press SET e The current settings are saved to the SD card If the SD card already has camera settings on it they will be overwritten Other Functions Transfer Menu s 4 When the confirmation screen appears press SET Loading Camera Settings from an SD Card 1 Open the Load From s2 submenu Other Functions 9 Transfer Menu fa 9 Load From 1 2 Select Menu or Menu 2 and then press SET e Selecting Menu will load menu settings and Menu 82 will load Load From szl menu and custom picture settings 3 Select OK and press SET e After the camera s current settings are replaced with the settings saved on the SD card the screen will turn black momentarily and the camera will restart 1 NOTES e The SD card includes a text file that lists the camera settings You can check the settings by using a USB card reader to access the SD card on a computer In the PRIVATE CAMSET folder open the file CAMSET5 TXT e When loading camera settings from an SD card even protected c
216. nd BR Mark index screen only Available in the clip index screen only Available in the Photos index screen and photo playback screen only Available only when the optional WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter is attached to the camera Reset Reset various camera settings All Settings Resets all the camera s settings to default settings except for the hour meter Camera Settings Resets the white balance iris M only ISO speed gain shutter speed M Camera Setup settings and custom picture settings to default settings Assignable Buttons Resets the assignable buttons to default settings Tally Lamp Allows you to set whether the tally lamp illuminates while recording Media Access LED Allows you to set whether the CF card access indicators or the SD card access indicator illuminates while the camera is accessing a CF card or SD card Genlock Adjust The phase difference between the external Genlock signal and the camera is initially set to O This function allows you to adjust it within the range of approx 0 4 H 1023 to 1023 When setting to 1000 or more or 1000 or less set the first field to 10 or 10 respectively Menu Options Delete Last Clip Deletes the last MXF clip you recorded This setting option will not appear if you turned the camera off since recording the last clip Reset Hour Meter The camera has two hour meters the first keeps track of total operation time and the
217. nd Language Settings Displaying the Date and Time while Recording LA LCD VF Setup You can display the date and time on the screen Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF Custom Display 2 1 Press the MENU button Date Time 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select off LA LCD VF Setup 3 Select Custom Display 2 and then Date Time in a similar fashion 4 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the information to display e Select Off to record without displaying the date and time 5 Press SET and then press the MENU button to close the menu e The selected date time display will appear at the bottom of the screen Changing the Language f Other Functions The default language of the camera is English You can change it to German Spanish French Italian Polish Russian Simplified Chinese Korean or Japanese Please note that some settings and screens will be Language displayed in English regardless of the language setting l English Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF 1 Press the MENU button 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select f Other Functions 3 Select Language 6 amp 2 in a similar fashion 4 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select a language 5 Press SET to change the language and then press the MENU button to close the menu Using the Menus Using the Menus In CAMERA mode
218. nd remove the cover 3 Pressing lightly use a Phillips head screwdriver to turn the ND filter as necessary e You can check the position of the ND filter through the lens mount 4 Return the cover and tighten the screw Using the Camera Abroad Power Sources You can use the compact power adapter to operate the camera and to charge battery packs in any country with power supply between 100 and 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Consult a Canon Service Center for information on plug adapters for overseas use Optional Accessories Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are compatible with this camera The availability differs from area to area 198 BP 950G BP 955 CA 940N Compact CA 930 Compact BP 970G BP 975 Power Adapter Power Adapter Battery Pack RC V100 Remote TA 100 Tripod Adapter TB 1 Tripod Adapter Controller Base WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter This accessory cannot be used to power this camera directly it can only be used to charge the battery pack For tripods with 0 95 cm 3 8 in screws For our customers in the USA Call or visit your local retailer dealer for genuine Canon video accessories You can also obtain genuine accessories for your Canon camera by calling 1 800 828 4040 Canon U S A Information Center Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories Canon shall not
219. nd the time code display starts running on the Wi Fi Remote screen e Press START STOP again to pause the recording Recording operation Time code Onscreen Displays Recording Video Refer to this section for an explanation of the various screen displays that appear in camera mode You can use the custom display function QQ 124 to turn off individual onscreen displays if they are not required OON OOF W O 13 10 11 12 13 14 Wi FiTD i 5 28 min 1 25 26 When displaying the date and time 1 28 mA 5500 K ISO 850 180 00 CHAR REC RAW reise 19 C3 20 10 0 LIM CH2 esses 2 28 29 303132 33 3 2012 9 20PM CF card status available recording time LL 56 During 4K and 2K modes CF card recording operation LL 63 During MXF mode Remaining recording time for double slot recording LL 47 Current focal length of an attached EF lens Temperature warning Fan ND filter LZ 73 View assistance LL 58 Custom picture LL 114 Key lock LL 53 White balance LL 76 Remaining battery time Q 56 Wi Fi QQ 50 white connected to a Wi Fi network yellow connecting to or disconnecting from a Wi Fi network During 4K and 2K modes Recording command status During MXF mode Recording operation LL 56 Characte
220. ng these higher capacity battery packs you will need to remove it beforehand Note that removing the battery compartment cover will render the camera more exposed to moisture dust and foreign objects 1 Slide down the BATT OPEN switch and open the battery compartment cover 2 Push the latch at the bottom of battery compartment 3 Gently pull out the battery compartment cover Regarding the use of non Canon battery packs e We recommend using genuine Canon battery packs bearing the Intelligent System intelligent Li ion Battery mark e f you attach to the camera battery packs that are not genuine Canon battery packs the remaining battery time will not be displayed 194 Handling Precautions weonraNr e To prevent equipment breakdown do not connect the battery charger to voltage converters Recording Media e We recommend backing up the recordings on the recording media onto your computer Data may be corrupted or lost due to defects or exposure to static electricity Canon shall not be liable for lost or corrupted data Do not touch or expose the terminals to dust or dirt e Do not use recording media in places subject to strong magnetic fields e Do not leave recording media in places subject to high humidity and high temperature e Do not disassemble bend drop or subject recording media to shocks and do not expose them to water Check the direction before inserting the recording media Forcing recording media into
221. nification appears on the camera screen and an external monitor connected to the MON 1 or MON 2 terminal They will not appear when using the other terminals e Peaking Magnification will not affect recordings made on a CF card e When using the camera s screen to focus The camera features professional video scopes LL 100 You can display the edge monitor to help you focus even more accurately You can use peaking together with the edge monitor In such case the gain and frequency of the peaking effect will be adjusted automatically according to the gain settings of the edge monitor e You can use the f Other Functions 39 Custom Function 3 Magn Add Disp setting to activate peaking and the edge monitor while the picture on the screen is being magnified 82 Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns Using onscreen markers allows you to make sure your subject is correctly framed and is within the appropriate safe area The zebra patterns help you identify areas that are overexposed The onscreen displays and zebra pattern appear on the camera screen and an external monitor connected to the MON 1 terminal The onscreen markers and zebra pattern will not affect recordings made on a CF card or the signal output from the 3G SDI and MON 2 terminals Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF Displaying Onscreen Markers The camera offers 5 types of onscreen markers You can display multip
222. ntally vertically or both ways 38 Preparing the Camera Adjusting the Viewfinder LCD Screen You can adjust the brightness contrast color sharoness and backlight of the viewfinder and LCD screen independently of each other These adjustments will not affect your recordings LCD Setup VF Setup LCA LCD VF Setup Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA AK 2K MXF Brightness 0 1 Open the setup menu for the viewfinder or LCD screen ll eae 2 LA LCD VF Setup 9 LCD Setup or VF Setup Color 0 Sharpness 2 2 Select Brightness Contrast Color Sharpness or Backlight and Backlight Normal then press SET 3 Adjust the setting and then press SET e Hepeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other settings as necessary i NOTES e f you set an assignable button to LCD Setup or VF Setup QA 111 you can press the button to open the respective submenu Setting the Screen to Black amp White The viewfinder and LCD screen display in color by default but you can set L LCD VF Setup them to black amp white Even when the screen is black amp white onscreen text and icons will still be displayed in color LCD VF B amp W Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA _ 4K 2K MXF off 1 Open the LCD VF B amp W submenu LA LCD VF Setup 3 LCD VF B amp W 2 Select On and then press SET 1 NOTES e f you set an assignable button to LCD VF B amp W LL 111 you can pres
223. o 50 Default 0 B Gain Adjust the intensity of blue tones This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 Color Correction The camera detects the characteristics of a certain color color phase chroma area and Y level and corrects them when recording You can set the color correction for up to two different areas A and B Select Area Selects the area or areas to correct Available options are Area A Area B and Area A amp B Select Off to turn this setting off Default Off Area A Setting Determines the area in which colors will be corrected Phase Adjusts the color phase for area A This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default O Chroma Adjusts the color saturation for area A This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Area Adjusts the color range for area A This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Y Level Adjusts the brightness for area A This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Area A Revision Sets the amount of correction for area A Level Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 Phase Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase This setting can be adjusted from 18 to 18 Default 0 Area B Setting Determines the area in which colors will be corrected Phase Adjusts the color phase for area B This setting can be adjusted from O
224. o the photo s thumbnail e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e f a custom picture file is embedded in the photo it is also protected 164 Photo Operations imeortant e nitializing an SD card will permanently erase all the data it contains including protected photos and custom picture files Copying Custom Picture Files You can copy to the camera a custom picture file embedded in a photo Custom picture files can be copied from the photo playback screen or Photos index screen Operating modes MEDIA Copying a File from the Playback Screen 1 Display the photo with the custom picture file to be copied LZ 161 2 Press SET to open the photo menu 3 Select Copy File and then press SET e The E Data 1 3 screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a file slot in the camera e Alternatively you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button e You can push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to display the fa Data 2 3 and T8 Data 3 3 screens 4 Push the joystick left right to select the desired file slot and then press SET 5 Select OK and then press SET e The custom picture file embedded in the selected photo is copied overwriting the file in that slot e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation 6 When the confirmation message appears press SET Copying a File from the Index Screen 1 Open the Photos Index Screen LL 161 2 Move the orange selection frame to the
225. ode Changing the video configuration If the external time code signal is incorrect or there is no input signal the internal time code set in the 00 00 TC UB Setup amp Time Code submenu will be recorded instead e When the camera locks on an external time code signal EXT LOCK appears on the rear panel 89 90 Synchronizing with an External Device Reference Video Signal Output You can output the camera s video signal as a reference sync signal analog blackburst or tri level signal through the SYNC OUT terminal to synchronize an external device to this camera Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF In camera mode you must first set 00 00 TC UB Setup 99 Time Code gt 24P TC Sync to Normal which is the default setting In mepia mode or if the default setting has not been changed in CAMERA mode start from step 3 below 1 Open the 24P TC Sync submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 93 Time Code 3 24P TC Sync 2 Select Normal and then press SET 3 Open the Output submenu 4K AK 2K MXF Setup in camera mode or E Video Setup in menia mode 3 SYNC OUT amp 3 Output 4 Select HD Sync tri level signal or BIk Burst black burst and then press SET e f necessary select Normal or XF Legacy with the 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 9 24P TC Sync setting e f necessary adjust the scan mode with the 4K 2K MXF Setup CAMERA Mode 00
226. of the instruction manual to view Developing RAW Clips Mac OS 1 From Applications open Canon Utilities gt Cinema RAW Development gt Manual 2 Open the folder of the language and double click the PDF file 1 NOTES e You can also view the instruction manual by starting the Cinema RAW Development software and then selecting Help gt View Instruction Manual 154 Saving MXF Clips to a Computer Saving MXF Clips to a Computer Use Canon XF Utility to save clips or one of the Canon XF plugins to import clips into non linear editing NLE software Canon XF Utility and the Canon XF plugins are available for free download from your local Canon Web site Refer to the Web site for the system requirements and the latest information about the software and plugins 159 For details about using the software refer to the respective instruction manual PDF file ee Plugins are available for NLE software by Avid and Apple Operating modes MEDIA Canon XF Utility Browser for transferring clips to a computer and playing back checking and managing clips Plugins for non linear editing NLE software The plugins allow you to transfer clips from a computer or a CF card connected via USB reader to a computer to the NLE software The following plugins are available Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Windows or Mac OS Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Windows or Mac OS Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro Mac
227. on screen Clip Info screen Push the joystick left right to switch to the previous next clip When you are finished press the CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen 4 56 7 8 u drm 240 min C 1 0 on 11 Ir 12 ir 13 14 S 00 02 06 o SET 219 3 End 00 02 51 NS 16 Nr Duration D 1 7 Prev 18 E Lens amp GD ME Data 1 3 3 wa 1j 1 Thumbnail of the selected clip 10 Clip name LL 53 2 Thumbnail of the previous clip 11 Bit rate and resolution LL 60 3 Thumbnail of the next clip 12 Frame rate LL 60 4 Shot mark Q 102 138 13 mark M mark LL 103 134 5 GPS information 14 Embedded custom picture file LZ 103 6 Special recording mode LL 105 15 Time code of the clip thumbnail Currently selected CF card slot LZ 46 16 Time code of the first frame in clip 8 Clip number Total number of clips 17 Time code of the last frame in clip 9 Recording date and time 18 Clip duration When displaying clips that were recorded using slow amp fast motion mode the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed Displaying the Lens Information W and User Memo From the Clip Info screen push the joystick up or turn the SELECT dial up to display the Lens amp MM screen In this screen you can check details about the lens used to record the clip If the clip has an embedded user memo you will see the user memo content in this screen as
228. onitor unit BP 955 battery pack and two CF cards 2705 g 6 0 Ib 2815 g 6 2 Ib Camera with monitor unit handle unit BP 955 battery pack and two CF cards 2885 g 6 4 Ib 2995 g 6 6 Ib All weights are approximate Modular Units Monitor Unit Modular unit can be rotated 270 on its axis includes the LCD panel recording and playback controls XLR terminals and related audio controls e LCD Panel Articulated panel 270 vertical rotation 180 lateral rotation e CD Screen 10 1 cm 4 0 in wide color approx 1 230 000 dots 10096 coverage e CH1 CH2 Terminals XLR jack pin1 shield pin2 hot pin3 cold 2 sets Sensitivity MIC setting 60 dBu manual volume center full scale 18 dB 600 Q LINE setting 4 dBu manual volume center full scale 18 dB 10 kQ Microphone attenuator 20 dB e Weight Approx 645 g 1 4 Ib Handle Unit Modular unit includes a cold accessory shoe and socket for 0 64 cm 1 4 in screws for other accessories e Weight Approx 180 g 6 3 oz CA 940N Compact Power Adapter e Rated Input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 0 72 A 100 V 0 39 A 240 V e Rated Output 8 4 V DC 4 1A e Operating Temperature O 40 C 32 104 F e Dimensions W x H x D Approx 103 x 51 x 189 mm 4 1 x 2 0 x 5 5 in e Weight 465 g 1 0 Ib Specifications CG 940 Battery Charger e Rated Input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 24 W e Rated Output 8 4 V DC 1 5 2 0 A e Operating Temper
229. ose the SD card slot cover e Do not force the cover closed if the SD card is not correctly inserted Preparing Recording Media imeortant e Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing Failure to do so may result in permanent data loss Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera Do not remove the SD card e urn off the camera before inserting or removing an SD card Inserting or removing the SD card with the camera on may result in permanent data loss e SD cards have front and back sides that are not interchangeable Inserting an SD card facing the wrong direction can cause a malfunction of the camera Be sure to insert the SD card as described in step 3 1 NOTES e To remove the SD card Push the SD card once to release it When the SD card springs out pull it all the way out e f you set the f Other Functions 3 Media Access LED function to Off the access indicators will not illuminate Initializing the Recording Media The first time you use any recording media with this camera initialize it first You can also initialize a recording media to permanently delete all the data it contains When initializing an SD card you can select quick initialization which clears the file allocation table but does not physically erase the stored data or complete initialization which deletes all data completely Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MX
230. ot be put on hold 85 86 Setting the Time Code About the Time Code Display An icon may appear next to the time code depending on the operation Refer to the following table Icon Description R The time code is set to Regen P The time code is set to Preset and the running mode is set to Rec Run F The time code is set to Preset and the running mode is set to Free Run E Time code signal is coming from an external source H Time code display is on hold No icon Time code during clip playback 1 NOTES e When the frame rate is 23 98P or 24 00P the frames value in the time code runs from O to 23 When the frame rate is 25 00P 50 00 or 50 00P it runs from O to 24 For other frame rates it runs from O to 29 In 4K and 2K modes or when using pre recording mode in MXF mode Free Run is set automatically and cannot be changed When you are using interval recording frame recording or slow amp fast motion recording mode you cannot select the Free Run running mode When you mix drop frame and non drop frame time codes there might be a discontinuity in the time code at the point where the recording starts As long as the built in rechargeable lithium battery is charged and you selected the Free Run running mode the time code continues to run even if you disconnect all other power sources However this is less accurate than when the camera is on If you set an assignable button to Time Code
231. ou can press SET to cancel 4 When the confirmation message appears press SET f Other Functions Delete All Photos 163 imPorTANTt e Be careful when deleting photos Deleted photos cannot be recovered Protecting Photos You can protect photos to prevent accidental erasure The custom picture file embedded in such a photo is also protected Photos can be protected from the photo playback screen or Photos index screen Operating modes MEDIA Protecting a Photo from the Playback Screen 1 Display the photo to be protected LL 161 2 Press SET to open the photo menu 3 Select Protect and then press SET e To remove protection settings from a protected photo select Unprotect instead e he screen prompts you to confirm the operation 4 Select OK and then press SET e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e The selected photo is protected and le appears on the lower left of the screen e f a custom picture file is embedded in the photo it is also protected Protecting a Photo from the Index Screen 1 Open the Photos Index Screen LL 161 2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be protected 3 Press SET to open the photo menu 4 Select Protect and then press SET e To remove protection settings from a protected photo select Unprotect instead e he screen prompts you to confirm the operation 5 Select OK and then press SET e The selected photo is protected and le appears next t
232. p 93 Audio Input 3 MIC Level 4 Use the joystick AV or SELECT dial to set the audio recording level and then press SET e As a guideline adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level meter on the screen or rear panel will go to the right of the 18 dB mark one mark right of the 20 dB mark only occasionally 1 NOTES Recording Audio 4 Audio Setup Audio Input XLR1 Mic Trimming XLR2 Mic Trimming 0 dB 4 Audio Setup Audio Input XLR1 Mic Att XLR2 Mic Att Off D Audio Setup Audio Input MIC Mode Automatic 4 Audio Setup Audio Input MIC Level 90 e When adjusting the audio level manually you can activate the audio peak limiter with the J Audio Setup 93 Audio Input 9 Limiter setting When activated the audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of audio input signals when they exceed 6 dBFS e We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level If the input level is too high audio may become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level e f you set an assignable button to Audio Level LL 111 you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio level indicator on and off 95 96 Recording Audio Activating the Microphone s Attenuator If the audio level is too high and the sound sounds distorted activate the Audio Setup microphone attenuator 20 dB Audio Inpu
233. photo playback screen or Photos index screen Operating modes MEDIA Deleting a Photo from the Playback Screen 1 Display the photo to be deleted LZ 161 2 Press SET to open the photo menu 3 Select Delete and then press SET e The screen prompts you to confirm the operation 4 Select OK and then press SET e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e he selected photo is deleted and the next photo is displayed e f a custom picture file is embedded in the photo it is also deleted 5 When the confirmation message appears press SET Deleting a Photo from the Index Screen 1 Open the Photos Index Screen LL 161 2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be deleted 3 Press SET to open the photo menu 4 Select Delete and then press SET e The screen prompts you to confirm the operation 5 Select OK and then press SET e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e The selected photo is deleted e f a custom picture file is embedded in the photo it is also deleted 6 When the confirmation message appears press SET Photo Operations Deleting All Photos 1 Display the Photos index screen or a photo LZ 161 2 Open the Delete All Photos submenu f Other Functions 9 Delete All Photos 3 Select OK and then press SET e All of the photos on the SD card except for protected ones will be deleted e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation e While the photos are being deleted y
234. photo with the custom picture file to be copied 3 Press SET to open the photo menu 4 Select Copy File and then press SET e The fa Data 1 3 screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a file slot in the camera e Alternatively you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button e You can push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to display the f Data 2 3 and J Data 3 3 screens 5 Push the joystick left right to select the desired file slot and then press SET 6 Select OK and then press SET e he custom picture file embedded in the selected photo is copied overwriting the file in that slot e Select Cancel instead to cancel the operation When the confirmation message appears press SET 1 NOTES e You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot with a protected file e By default file slots C8 and C9 are protected Photo Numbering Photos are automatically assigned consecutive numbers from 0101 to 9900 and stored on the SD card in folders containing up to 100 photos Folders are numbered from 101 to 998 You can select the photo numbering method to be used The photo number indicates the name and location of the file on the SD card For example a photo numbered 101 0107 is located in the DCIM 101 CANON folder as the file IMG 0107 jpg Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 1 Open the Photo Numbering submenu f Other Functions amp Photo Numbering 2 Select the des
235. playing back a clip from this index screen the index screen that was open before the Shot Mark index screen will appear 138 MXF Clip Operations Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single Clip You can display an index screen of a single clip broken down as frames at fixed intervals This is useful when you have a long clip or wish to play back a clip from a certain point You can change how many thumbnails are displayed You can also perform other operations from this index screen such as adding and deleting shot marks 1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu 2 Select Expand Clip and then press SET e The Expand Clip index screen appears which shows thumbnails of frames taken from the clip at fixed intervals The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame e You can change the fixed interval between frames by showing more or fewer thumbnails To show more thumbnails open the clip menu and select More Index Pics and then press SET To show fewer thumbnails select Fewer Index Pics and then press SET e Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen Thumbnail icon 228 min_ Expand Clip M H Indicates the frame used as the clip l i F fa thumbnail in the clip 00 14545 00 14 55 11 index screen Time code of the displayed frame Nov 3 2012 3 20PM PRE REC 29 97P m AAOOTS ay 50 Mbps 1920x1080 00 00 15 00 Gi NOTES e Aft
236. please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you purchased the Products or contact the CANON PROFESSIONAL SERVICE CENTRE 1 800 667 2666 or on the internet at www canon ca pro You will be directed to the nearest service facility for your Products This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Products and does not apply in the following cases A Loss or damage to the Products due to abuse mishandling accident improper maintenance use of non Canon accessories or failure to follow operating maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon Canada s user s manual B If the Products are defective as a result of leaking batteries sand dirt or water damage C If defects or damages are caused by the use of parts or supplies other than those sold by Canon Canada that cause damage to the Products or that cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon Canada s factory service centers or authorized service facilities Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Products If the Product has had its serial number or dating altered or removed G 1 ITI This Limited Warranty does not apply to Products purchased outside Canada This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or consumables not Originally packaged with the Product Please retain this w
237. press of a button Some assignable buttons are located on the monitor unit so their availability depends on the camera configuration used n MEDIA mode only assignable buttons 1 to 9 are available Operating odes CAMERA CMEDIA i 4 WX 10 11 12 lt lt I WFM lS 14 15 a H l EDGE MON LENS EXCHANGE LUT Changing the Assigned Function Other Functions 1 Open the Assign Button submenu f i Other Functions 93 Assign Button 2 Select the button to change and then press SET e A list of available functions appears 1 MAGN Assign Button e The quick reference to the right shows the default settings for each 2 PEAKING assignable button Also the label on the camera for assignable TR buttons 1 to 9 indicates the default setting By default buttons 10 to S LEN EXCHANGE 15 have no assignable function set 6 LUTI Assignable button 7 is usable only when you attach the grip unit of the C300 7 MAGN C300 PL or C100 4 WFM 3 Select the desired function and then press SET D EDGE MON e f you selected User Setting NONE the menu will change from 10 15 NONE orange to blue to indicate you are selecting a menu setting to register Continue the procedure to register a menu setting Otherwise you do not need to perform the rest of the procedure 4 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to register and then press SET e The selected men
238. r Using the Focus Assistance Functions In order to focus more accurately you can use two focus assistance functions peaking which creates a clearer contrast by emphasizing the outlines of the subject and magnification which enlarges the image on the screen You can use both functions simultaneously for greater effect You can also use the fr Other Functions 3 Custom Function 9 F Assist B amp W setting QA 123 to switch the screen and output from the MON terminals to black amp white while using the focus assistance functions Peaking LA LCD VF Setup The camera offers two peaking levels to help you focus more accurately 1 Press the PEAKING button Select e The peaking icon EW or GW appears at the lower center of the under Peaking screen and the outlines in the image on the screen will be emphasized depending on the focus Peaking 1 e Press the button again to turn off peaking e Alternatively you can use the L L CD VF Setup 3 Peaking setting to turn peaking on and off 2 Open the Select submenu under Peaking to select the peaking level LA LCD VF Setup 39 Select under Peaking 3 Select the desired level and then press SET e You can use the L L CD VF Setup 9 Peaking 1 and Peaking 2 TEN 3 Color Gain and Frequency settings to set the color gain and frequency of the two peaking levels independently of each other
239. r outlet you can change the battery pack while the power is on CAMERA MEDIA terminal 26 Preparing the Power Supply Turning the Camera On and Off The camera has two operating modes CAMERA camera mode for making recordings and MEDIA menia mode for playing back recordings Select the operating mode using the switch To turn on the camera Set the switch to CAMERA for camera mode or MEDIA for MEDIA mode e f a message appears prompting you to open the MON 3G SDI terminal cover open the cover to shoot in 4K or 2K mode Gu a CAMERA GE o Gu d CAMERA CAMERA s 49 4 MEDIA MEDIA CAMERA mode MEDIA mode Allows you to play back recordings made on a CF card To turn off the camera Set the switch to OFF Cm A CAMERA Ze MEDIA Date Time and Language Settings Date Time and Language Settings Setting the Date and Time You will need to set the date and time of the camera before you can start using it When the cameras clock is 27 not set the Date Time screen will appear automatically with the first field selected month or day depending on the country region of purchase Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF Clock Set Date Time a Jan MAN Y 1 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to change the month day then move W to the next field e o move to the next field you can also press SET press the joystick itse
240. r panel which is convenient when the monitor unit is not attached to the camera This section will explain the basic operation of the direct setting mode For specific details about the functions please refer to the each function s section shutter speed L 67 white balance LL 76 ISO speed gain LL 70 Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Using the Direct Setting Mode 1 Press the FUNC button e On the screen The onscreen display of the function to be adjusted will be highlighted in orange On the rear panel Only the icon white balance or value ISO speed gain shutter speed of the function to be adjusted will be displayed e Repeatedly pressing the FUNC button or pushing the joystick left right will change the function to be adjusted in the following order White balance gt Color temperature preset white balance ISO speed gain gt Shutter speed gt Direct setting mode off 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired value ISO speed gain shutter speed or desired white balance mode and then press SET e The selected value will be set and the camera will exit the direct setting mode e On the screen The onscreen display of the selected function will return to normal On the rear panel The display will return to normal all displays will reappear e Depending on the function selected additional adjustment may be possible or necessary before pressing SET 1 NOTES
241. r recording LL 123 16 Interval counter Q 105 17 Available number of photos 18 Recording mode LL 60 Bit rate LL 64 19 Resolution LL 62 64 20 Frame rate shooting frame rate during slow amp fast motion mode LL 60 108 21 During MXF mode Recording command status LL 170 22 User memo M 97 23 User bit LL 87 24 Audio output channel Q 96 25 Aperture value LL 74 26 ISO speed Gain LZ 70 27 Magnification LL 80 28 Shutter angle LL 67 29 Peaking QA 80 30 Lens warning LL 173 31 Output displays QJ 151 32 Audio peak limiter Q 94 33 Audio level meter QJ 94 95 14 Genlock LL 88 15 Time code LL 84 The displayed value is an estimate 34 Date time QJ 28 Only when an optional WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter is connected to the camera a During 4K and 2K modes when the shooting frame rate is enclosed by brackets this indicates that both 3G SDI terminals are necessary to record the 3G SDI output signal on an external recorder OD 56 Recording Video Gi NOTES e You can press the DISP button to switch the onscreen displays in the following sequence Show all onscreen displays show only onscreen markers gt hide all onscreen displays Only when the LA LCD VF Setup Markers setting is enabled 1 CF card status available recording time e The following indicates the CF card status O B Can record on CF card V V No CF card or cannot record on CF card Th
242. ration e During this special recording mode the running mode of the time code L 84 can be set to Rec Run or Regen The time code advances by the number of frames recorded If the running mode of the time code LL 84 is set to Free Run or the time code is input from an external source the running mode will switch to Rec Run during special recording mode When special recording mode is deactivated the running mode will return to its previous setting e During special recording mode the time code signal will not be output from the MON terminals TIME CODE terminal or HD SD SDI terminal During 4K and 2K modes the time code signal will be output from the 3G SDI terminals During MXF mode only Frame Recording Mode oet the number of frames in advance We recommend operating the camera remotely or stabilizing the camera for example on a tripod Sound is not recorded in this mode During 4K and 2K modes MXF clips will not be recorded simultaneously on a CF card even if a card is inserted in the camera Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Special Recording Modes Configuring Frame Recording Mode 1 Open the Rec Frames submenu 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 Frame Rec 3 Rec Frames Frame Rec 2 Select the desired number of frames and then press SET 107 Number of Frames Recorded Rec Frames System priority Frame rate Frames recorded AK 1 Any 2K 1 3 6 9 UE 59 94i
243. rd Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF To use relay recording 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup By default this function is activated If it has been deactivated follow the procedure below to activate it Set CF Card Slot 1 Open the Relay Rec submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 93 Set CF Card Slot 3 Relay Rec Relay Rec 2 Select On and then press SET On Preparing Recording Media To use double slot recording 3K 4K 2K MXF Setup 1 Open the Double Slot Rec submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 93 Set CF Card Slot 3 Double Slot Rec Set CF Card Slot 2 Select On and then press SET 4r i NOTES e When the bit rate is set to 50 Mbps QA 60 relay recording is not Off available during slow motion recording e f a CF card becomes full during double slot recording recording on both cards will stop On the other hand if an error occurs with one of the cards recording will continue on the other card e Double slot recording cannot be used with relay recording or slow amp fast motion recording Double Slot Rec Checking the Available Recording Time for CF Cards When the camera is in CAMERA mode the display on the upper left of the screen indicates which CF card slot is in use and the available recording time in minutes that remains on each CF card The same information is displayed in the rear panel When the camera is in MEDIA mode the available recording time is displayed only in the rear panel On t
244. rea Adjusts the color range for detection of skin tones This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Y Level Adjusts the brightness for detection of skin tones This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Selective NH The camera detects the characteristics of a certain color or tone and applies a noise reduction filter to the targeted areas A zebra pattern will appear over targeted areas on the screen Effect Level Adjusts the level of the noise reduction filter The available options are Off Low Middle and High Default Off Hue Adjusts the hue for the color to be detected This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default O Chroma Adjusts the color saturation for the color to be detected This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Area Adjusts the color range for the color to be detected This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Y Level Adjusts the brightness for the color to be detected This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Custom Picture Settings Color Matrix Color matrix affects the color tones throughout the whole image This setting is not available when Gamma is set to Canon Log Select Available options are Normal 1 to Normal 4 Cine 1 and Cine 2 Canon Log and EOS Std Generally this is the same setting as Gamma After selecting an option you can make more precise adjustments
245. ree Run The time code starts running the moment you press SET to select this option and keeps running regardless of the camera s operation Regen The camera will read the selected CF card and the time code will continue from the last recorded time code on the CF card The time code runs only while recording so clips recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time codes Setting the Time Code Setting the Time Code s Initial Value lf you set the time code mode to Preset you can set the initial value of 00 00 TC UB Setup the time code Time Code 1 Open the time code Setting submenu 00 00 TC UB Setup 3 Time Code 9 Setting Setting 2 Select Set and then press SET e The time code setting screen appears with an orange selection frame indicating the hours e To reset the time code to 00 00 00 00 select Reset instead If the running mode is set to Free Run the time code will be reset the moment you press SET and keep running continuously from 00 00 00 00 3 Use the joystick AW or SELECT dial to set the hours and press SET to move to the minutes 4 Change the rest of the fields minutes seconds frame in the same way e Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the time code 5 Select Set and then press SET to close the screen e f the running mode is set to Free Run the time code will start running from the selected time code the moment you press SET
246. rmance Do not carry the camera by the LCD panel or monitor unit Be careful when closing the LCD panel Do not leave the camera in places subject to high temperatures like the inside of a car parked under direct sunlight or high humidity Because the camera s temperature can rise significantly do not hold the camera for long periods of time while shooting Do not use the camera near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors MRI machines or high voltage power lines Using the camera in such places may cause anomalies in the video or audio or video noise to appear Do not use or store the camera in dusty or sandy places The camera is not waterproof avoid also water mud or salt If any of the above should get into the camera it may damage the camera and or the lens Consult a Canon Service Center as soon as possible Be careful to avoid dust and dirt particles accumulating on the lens or entering the camera When you finish using the camera make sure to attach the body cap to the lens mount and the lens cap and dust cap to the lens Do not point the camera or viewfinder toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Do not leave the camera pointed at a bright subject Internal components may become damaged due to concentration of the light by the lens Be careful especially when using a tripod or shoulder strap When you are not using the camera or vie
247. rmore even in 4K and 2K modes the camera can record MXF files on a CF card Multitude of recording options The camera offers you numerous options when it comes to the video configuration of your recordings When recording in 4K or 2K mode you can select the recording mode RAW HRAW 4K1K RAW RGB 4 4 4 12 bit RGB 4 4 4 10 bit or YCC 4 2 2 10 bit system frequency 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz 24 00 Hz resolution various settings from 1920x1080 to 4096x2160 and frame rate various settings from 23 98P up to 59 94P This allows you to select a video configuration to suit your needs from a total of 46 different combinations When recording in MXF mode you can select the system frequency bit rate resolution and frame rate of your recordings These options allow you to choose from a total of 27 different combinations Recording media Because there are two CF card slots when one CF card slot becomes full the recording will automatically continue on the other one without interruption when you use relay recording LL 46 In addition using double slot recording LL 47 lets you record the same clip simultaneously to both CF cards 3G SDI and MON terminals The camera features dual 3G SDI terminals LL 41 that can output 4K or 2K image data to an external recorder The dual MON terminals Q 41 are HD SDI terminals that can output YCC 4 2 2 10 bit 2K or full HD video allowing external live monitoring during shoots You can even
248. rnal recorder must be compatible with Canon RAW files Refer to Canon s Web site for the latest information on compatible recorders Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K 1 Unscrew the screw on the MON 3G SDI terminal cover and pull the cover out 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 2 Connect two commercially available BNC cables to the camera s 3G SDI terminals and the external recorder 3G SDI Output e Refer to the external recorder s instruction manual for details 3 Open the 8G SDI Output submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 93 3G SDI Output 4 Select On and then press SET On imeortant e After you connect the camera to the external recorder make a test recording first to check if they are operating correctly i NOTES e You can also remove the MON 3G SDI terminal cover by sliding the screw toward the back of the camera and then pulling tt outward along with the cover e f you do not intend to use the 3G SDI terminals in other situations set the camera to MXF mode LL 64 and then close the MON 3G SDI terminal cover in order to conserve the camera s power When you do so the camera can record only in MXF mode e You can use the ll Camera Setup 9 Color Space setting to configure the color space of the video output from the 3G SDI terminal and MON terminals to DCI P3 Cinema Gamut or BT 2020 When checking the output you will need a display device that is compatible with each color space 42 Connecting
249. roducts This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Products and does not apply in the following cases A Loss or damage to the Products due to abuse mishandling accident improper maintenance use of non Canon accessories or failure to follow operating maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon USA s user s manual If the Products are defective as a result of leaking batteries sand dirt or water damage C If defects or damages are caused by the use of parts or supplies other than those sold by Canon USA that cause damage to the Products or that cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon USA s factory service centers or authorized service facilities Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Products If the Product has had its serial number or dating altered or removed UJ G5 m1 TI CZ This Limited Warranty does not apply to Products purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or consumables not originally packaged with the Product Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale as a permanent record of your purchase This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection modification or Product recall under applicable laws or regulations NO IMPLIED WARRAN
250. s not a malfunction Bright red green or blue dots appear on the screen The camera s CMOS sensor is a delicate piece of precision engineering Direct exposure of the sensor to ion rays or other types of cosmic radiation may affect it and this may rarely appear as bright colored dots on the screen This is the nature of CMOS image sensors and does not represent a malfunction Adjusting the black balance Q 48 may help solve the problem The effects of the damage may be more noticeable when the camera is used in places subject to high temperatures when a high ISO speed or gain level is used and when slow shutter speeds are used Changing between recording 6 REC and record pause STBY takes longer than usual When the CF card contains a large number of clips some operations may take longer than usual Save your clips LL 155 and initialize the CF card LL 45 Alternatively replace the CF card The camera cannot record to a CF card properly This may occur as recordings are made and deleted over time Save your clips LL 155 and initialize the CF card Q 45 186 Troubleshooting The camera becomes hot during use The camera may become hot while shooting This is not a malfunction The camera s internal temperature will rise if the cooling fan filter under the MON 3G SDI terminal cover has clogged Replace the filter JJ 196 The built in ND filter is stuck and does not change The electronic motor that drives
251. s output from the HD SD SDI terminal the signal is converted to 59 94i using the 2 3 pulldown method An external device can receive the data used in this conversion 2 3 pulldown data to convert the signal to the original 23 98P specifications 91 92 Recording Audio Recording Audio The camera features two channel linear PCM audio recording and playback with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz You can record audio using commercially available microphones XLR terminal MIC terminal or line input XLR terminal You can select the audio input independently for channel 1 and channel 2 An audio signal will be output with the video signal from the 3G SDI terminals MON terminals and HD SD SDI terminal When you use an external recorder the audio signal will also be recorded Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Input Source to the Camera In order to use the XLR terminals the monitor unit must be attached to the camera The monitor unit features two XLR terminals CH1 CH2 that can be used to record audio independently to the two audio channels In addition to XLR microphones you can also connect to the camera s MIC terminal commercially available condenser microphones with their own power supply and a 3 5 mm mini stereo plug If the monitor unit is attached to the camera you can use the microphone holder on the monitor unit For 50 00 Hz recordings use commercially ava
252. s set to AF Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote After completing the necessary preparations Q 50 you can adjust the focus remotely from a Wi Fi enabled device using the Wi Fi Remote application 1 Set the focus mode switch on the EF lens to AF autofocus mode 2 Press one of the focus controls to adjust the focus as necessary e Press one of the controls on the NEAR side to focus closer or one of the controls on the FAH side to focus farther away e There are three levels of adjustment lt gt is the smallest and gt the largest 80 Adjusting the Focus 1 NOTES e f the focus mode switch on the EF lens is set to MF you will not be able control the focus through remote operation Depending on the lens used remote operation may not work correctly e f you operate the zoom after focusing the focus on the subject may be lost e f you focus manually and then leave the camera with the power turned on the focus on the subject may be lost after a while This possible slight shift in focus is a result of the internal temperature rising in the camera and lens Check the focus before resuming shooting e While the camera is focusing do not touch the end of the lens or focus ring while they are moving e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can adjust the focus with the remote controllers FOCUS dial Turn the dial right to focus farther and left to focus neare
253. s the button to turn the black amp white display on and off Using a Tripod The camera is shipped with the TB 1 Tripod Base for tripods with 0 95 cm 3 8 in screws You can mount the camera on a tripod but do not use tripods with mounting screws longer than 5 5 mm 0 2 in as this may cause damage to the camera Using a Tripod with 0 64 cm 1 4 in Mounting Screws To use a tripod with 0 64 cm 1 4 in mounting screws first attach the supplied tripod adapter base to the camera and then attach the tripod to the adapter base 1 Remove the original TB 1 tripod base from the camera e Remove the 4 screws and then remove the base 2 Attach the supplied triood adapter base for 0 64 cm 1 4 in tripods e Firmly screw in the 4 screws 3 Attach the tripod e Firmly screw in the tripod screw Attaching the Handle Unit 1 Insert the attachment base at the bottom of the handle unit to the camera s accessory shoe 2 Tighten the handle unit s lock screw while gently pressing it down i NOTES e You can use the accessory shoe or the socket for 0 64 cm 1 4 in screws on the handle unit to attach a variety of commercially available accessories Attaching a Shoulder Strap Pass the ends through the strap mount and adjust the length of the strap imeortant e Be careful not to drop the camera when attaching or adjusting the shoulder strap Preparing the Camera Preparing the Camera Removing and Att
254. s the camera s ND FILTER button 14 Adjusting the Aperture Adjusting the Aperture You can affect the brightness of your recordings or change the depth of field by adjusting the aperture For example use a small aperture value for a shallow depth of field that isolates the subject in focus and nicely blurs the background Available aperture values will vary depending on the EF lens attached to the camera Operating modes CAMERA 4K 2K MXF Using the Control Dial You can adjust the aperture value of most EF lenses using the control dial on the camera When you have attached the grip unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 to the camera you can select the function assigned to each control dial independently By default the control dial s function is set to aperture control If it has been changed follow the procedure below to set the control dial s function to Iris in advance Control dial Assigning Aperture Control to the Control Dial f Other Functions 1 Open the Control Dial submenu f Other Functions 39 Custom Function 3 Control Dial Custom Function When you are assigning the function to the control dial on the grip unit of the C300 C300 PL or C100 select Grip Ctrl Dial instead 2 Select Iris and then press SET Control Dial In Selecting the Increment Scale to Use When Adjusting the tris Aperture 1 Open the Iris Increment submenu PE Camera Setup PAR Camera
255. second keeps track of operation time since the last time the second hour meter was reset with this function Firmware You can verify the current version of the camera s firmware This menu option is usually unavailable X My Menu caveg4 mode only Edit Menu item Submenu Setting options RA Register Cancel OK 30 Move Cancel OK Delete Cancel OK Reset All Cancel OK 177 Displaying the Status Screens Displaying the Status Screens You can use the status screens to check the camera s various recording and playback related settings You can also output the status screens on an external monitor 178 Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA AK 2K MXF 1 Press the STATUS button e The status screen most recently displayed will appear unless you turned off the camera or changed the operating mode In such case the Camera status screen appears in CAMERA mode and the Assign Button 1 2 status screen appears in MEDIA mode 2 Push the joystick up down or use the SELECT dial to scroll through the status screens 3 When you are finished press the STATUS button again _ to exit the status screens e Alternatively you can press the MENU or CUSTOM PICTURE button Doing so will exit the status screen and open the respective menu Status screen Description CAMERA MEDIA LL Gamma Color Space Displays
256. ser Memo Using Wi Fi Remote 98 Color Bars Audio Reference Signal 99 Recording Color Bars 99 Recording an Audio Reference Signal 99 Video Scopes 100 Displaying a Video Scope 100 Configuring the Waveform Monitor 100 Configuring the Vectorscope 101 Configuring the Edge Monitor 101 Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips 102 Adding Shot Marks while Recording 102 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 102 Adding an IR Mark or M Mark to the Last Clip Recorded 103 Remote Operation Using Wi Fi Remote 103 Reviewing an MXF Clip 104 Special Recording Modes 105 Interval Recording Mode 105 Frame Recording Mode 106 Slow amp Fast Motion Mode 108 Pre recording Mode 110 4 Customization 111 Assignable Buttons 111 Changing the Assigned Function 111 Using an Assignable Button 112 Custom Picture Settings 114 Selecting Custom Picture Files 114 Editing a Custom Picture File s Settings 115 Renaming Custom Picture Files 115 Protecting Custom Picture Files 115 Transferring Custom Picture Files 116 Embedding Custom Picture Settings in a Recording 117 Available Custom Picture Settings 117 Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays 123 Customizing Functions 123 Customizing Onscreen Displays 124 Saving and Loading Camera Settings 125 Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card 125 Loading Camera Settings from an SD Card 125 5 Playback 127 Playing Back MXF Clips 127 Clip Index Screen 127 Playing Back Clips 128 Onscreen Displays 129 Playback Controls 13
257. settings to the preset levels you selected You can even add custom picture settings to MXF clips recorded on a CF card or photos recorded on an SD card You can save up to 9 different custom picture files on the camera and up to 20 custom picture files on an SD card Custom picture files can be copied between the camera and recording media Custom picture files created with this camera are compatible only with other C500 and C500 PL cameras Operating modes CAMERA AK 2K MXF Selecting Custom Picture Files Select a custom picture file to apply its settings to your recordings or to edit rename protect or transfer it 1 If necessary set fa CINEMA Locked to Off LL 58 2 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button e The custom picture menu appears The currently selected file appears next to the SET icon or Off if no file is selected e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera you can display the custom picture menu with the CUSTOM PICT button 3 Select the desired file and then press SET e Select Off to record without applying any custom picture settings e o apply the custom picture settings of the selected file continue to step 4 To perform other operations on the selected file edit settings copy protect etc continue instead with the one of the procedures in the following pages 4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu e The selected custom picture f
258. slow amp fast motion mode the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed 130 Playing Back MXF Clips 7 Playback operation P PLAY Playback Il PAUSE Playback pause lt i gt Frame reverse Frame advance F FWD 5 Fast playback lt q F REV Fast reverse playback The playback speed x5 x15 or x60 will also appear in the indicator 9 Relay recording Appears when a clip begins on one CF card and continues uninterrupted on the other IE indicates the first part of the recording indicates the middle part s and indicates the last part Playback Controls When you play back a clip operate the buttons on camera s body or on the monitor unit or use the joystick and joystick guide to use fast playback play back frame by frame or skip clips Refer to the following table Available Playback Types Playback type Operation Buttons Press the lt 4 lt or BP button Joystick During playback push the joystick up or down Repeat to increase the playback speed to approximately 5X 2 15x gt 60x the normal speed Joystick During playback pause push the joystick up or down Fast playback Frame advance reverse Skip to the beginning of Buttons Press the P button the next clip Joystick Push the joystick right Skip to the beginning of Buttons Press the kad button the current clip Joystick Push the joystick left Buttons Press
259. ssary use the buttons and dials on the remote controller to adjust them Black 3 Master Pedestal Black 3 Master Black 3 Red Blue Black Gamma 39 Level Knee 3 Slope and Point only when Knee 9 Enable is set to On Sharpness Level White Balance 3 R Gain B Gain a m m es Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays Customize the camera to match your shooting style and needs Use the f Other Functions 9 Custom Function setting to adjust how some of the camera s controls and functions operate in CAMERA mode Similarly use the L LCD VF Setup 39 Custom Display 1 or Custom Display 2 setting to customize the onscreen 123 displays that appear on the screen during recording You can save these preferences along with other menu settings to an SD card and use them again later QQ 125 Customizing Functions f Other Functions The following table describes which functions can be customized using Custom Function l Custom Function Operating modes CAMERA 4k 2K MXF 1 Open the Custom Function submenu f Other Functions 39 Custom Function 2 Select the desired function 3 Change the setting option and then press SET Customizable Functions with Custom Function Menu item Setting options Description Shockless WB On Off Creates a softer transition when the white bal
260. t 1 Open the MIC Att submenu D Audio Setup amp Audio Input 9 MIC Att MIC Att 2 Select On and then press SET Off Monitoring the Audio with Headphones Connect headphones to the headphone terminal to monitor the recorded audio You can adjust the headphone volume with the D Audio Setup amp Audio Output 3 Headphone Volume setting For 50 00 Hz recordings use commercially available headphones with a cable no longer than 3 m Selecting the Audio Channel You can select the audio channel that is output from the Q headphone terminal Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K J 2K J MXF headphone terminal 1 Open the Channel submenu D Audio Setup 939 Audio Output 3 Channel D Audio Setup 2 Select the desired option and then press SET Audio Output Options CH1 CH2 Audio from CH1 is output from the left audio channel and Channel audio from CH2 is output from the right audio channel CH1 CH1 Audio from CH1 is output from both the left and right audio channels Ore CH2 CH2 Audio from CH2 is output from both the left and right audio channels All All Audio from CH1 and CH2 is mixed and output from both the left and right audio channels 1 NOTES e f you set an assignable button to Audio Output CH LL 111 you can press the button to change the audio channel directly Using Metadata Using Metadata The camera automatically adds
261. t LT 45 Invalid operation The following operations cannot be performed e Adding a shot mark to a clip that already has a shot mark or to a clip in frame recording mode or interval recording mode e Adding an Wf mark to clip that already has an f mark or adding a M mark to a clip that already has a M mark e n camera mode immediately reviewing a recording made in a special recording mode e Pressing the START STOP button when there is no CF card in the camera during MXF mode No clips There are no clips on the CF card to play back Clips must be recorded Q 51 in order to play them back No photos There are no photos on the SD card to play back Photos must be taken Q 159 in order to view them No Shot Marks This message appears if shot marks in a clip were deleted from the Shot Mark index screen Press the INDEX button to return to the clip index screen Number of Shot Marks at maximum The shot mark could not be added because the clip already contains 100 shot marks El and Bl marks combined You must delete shot marks L 139 before adding any more Please open the MON 3G SDI terminal cover The camera cannot enter 4K or 2K mode when the MON 3G SDI terminal cover is closed Open the cover Recorded at 24 00 Hz Check the data on CF A CF B Initializing the card is also recommended The CF card contains 24 00 Hz recordings To record on this CF card save your clips QJ 155 and initialize the CF card LL
262. t the procedure is similar for the Canon XF plugins e The file xum dmg will be created 2 Double click xum dmg e The xum icon will appear on the desktop 3 Double click xum and then double click XUMInstaller 4 Follow the onscreen instructions to select your area continent country region and language e Available options will vary depending on your country region 5 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications exit other applications and then click OK e The softwares license agreement appears 6 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation e f you do not select Yes you cannot install the software e When the installation has completed Installation has completed successfully appears Click Next and then click Finish Uninstalling the Software Mac OS Drag and drop the file or folder corresponding to the software that you want to uninstall to Trash Canon XF Utility Applications Canon Utilities Canon XF Utility Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro Library Application Support ProApps MIO RAD Plugins CanonXF RADPlug Saving MXF Clips to a Computer Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X Library Application Support ProApps MIO RADPlugins CanonXF64 RADPlIug Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access 157 Library Application Support Avid AVX2 Plug ins AMA MVP CanonXF avx Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Library Application Support ProApps Avid AVX2_Plug_ins A
263. tead Make sure to connect the microphone first before il turning the phantom power on Keep the microphone connected Ewtoles when turning off the phantom power e When using the XLR terminal to record to only one channel use the CH1 terminal Selecting the Recording Channel You can select to which channel the camera will record audio M Audio Setup 1 Open the XL R Rec Channel submenu Audio Input D Audio Setup 99 Audio Input 3 XLR Rec Channel 2 Select the desired option and then press SET XLR Rec Channel Options CH1 Records audio to each channel separately Audio input CH1 into CH1 is recorded to channel 1 while audio input into CH2 is recorded to channel 2 CH1 CH2 Audio input into CH1 is recorded to both channels Audio input into CH2 will not be recorded imeortant e When connecting a microphone or device that does not support phantom power make sure to set the XLR terminal switch to MIC or LINE respectively If you set the switch to MIC 48V the microphone or device may be damaged 94 Recording Audio Adjusting the Audio Level from the XLR Terminals You can set the audio recording level for audio input from the XLR terminals to auto or manual for each channel Automatic Audio Level Adjustment Set the switch of the desired channel to A automatic to let the camera automatically adjust that channel s audio level Gi NOTES E e When both CH1 and CH2 are set to the same audio
264. ted or there was an encoder error Turn off the camera and back on again Then remove the CF card being used and reinsert it Alternatively replace the CF card If this does not solve the problem consult a Canon Service Center e Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot be read by the Canon XF Utility software or associated plugins CF A CF B Reached the recording limit for one clip Recording was stopped When recording a single clip for an extended period of time the clip will be split into smaller video files every 2 GB or 1 GB when recording in slow motion This message will appear when the number of smaller video files reaches 99 CF A CF B Using a card that supports UDMA mode 4 or higher is recommended The CF card s UDMA mode is lower than UDMA4 We recommend using a CF card that with a UDMA mode of at least UDMAA CF A2CF B CF B2CF A Switched This message appears when you use the SLOT SELECT button to switch the CF card slot in use or recording continued from one CF card to the other CF A2CF B CF B2CF A Will switch in a moment The CF card is almost full so recording will continue on the other CF card in approximately 1 minute 190 Troubleshooting CF card slot cover is open The CF card slot cover was open when the camera was switched to or turned on in camera mode Close the cover Change the battery pack The battery pack is exhauste
265. the 1 kHz Tone submenu D Audio Setup 93 Audio Input amp 1 kHz Tone 2 Select the desired level and then press SET e Available levels are 12 dB 18 dB and 20 qB e Select Off to turn off the signal e The signal is output at the selected level and will be recorded when you press the START STOP button Color Bars Audio Reference Signal PAR Camera Setup Color Bars Type SMPTE or EBU Depending on the country region of purchase PAR Camera Setup Color Bars Enable Off D Audio Setup Audio Input 1 kHz Tone Off 99 100 Video Scopes Video Scopes The camera can display a simplified waveform monitor or vectorscope It can also display an edge monitor to help you focus The video scopes appear only on the LCD screen They do not appear in the viewfinder or on an external monitor In order to use the video scopes the monitor unit must be attached to the camera The edge monitor looks at the focus of the entire picture and displays the results as a waveform The edge monitor is available only in cAMERA mode Displaying a Video Scope Press the WFM button waveform monitor or vectorscope or EDGE MON button edge monitor Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF e The waveform monitor will appear in a window on the lower right of the screen e You can repeatedly press the WFM button to activate the video scopes in the following sequence Wa
266. the lt q button twice Joystick Push the joystick left twice Buttons Press the B gt Hl button Joystick Press the joystick itself SET button Skip to the previous clip Return to playback mode 1 NOTES e There is no audio during any of the playback types listed in the previous table e During some special playback modes you may notice some anomalies blocky video artifacts banding etc in the playback picture e The speed indicated on the screen is approximate e During frame advance the time advanced between frames depends on the video configuration used 0 2 seconds for 1280x720 24 00P 1280x720 23 98P or 1280x720 59 94P 0 25 seconds for 1280x720 50 00P and 0 5 seconds for other video configurations e You can press the DISP button to turn the joystick guide display on and off Audio Output During playback audio will be available through the headphone terminal You can adjust the headphone volume with the Audio Setup 9 Audio Output 3 Headphone Volume setting The audio signal will also be output through the HD SD SDI terminal and the HDMI OUT terminal 1 NOTES e For details on changing the audio channel refer to Se ecting the Audio Channel LL 96 Playing Back MXF Clips headphone terminal 131 MXF Clip Operations MXF Clip Operations Besides playing back a clip you can perform other operations such as deleting a clip or displaying clip informat
267. the ND filter may not be working correctly As an emergency measure you can operate the ND filter manually L 197 Eventually consult a Canon Service Center Playing Back MXF Clips Cannot delete a clip You cannot delete clips with an MN mark Remove the N mark 1 134 to delete the clip Deleting clips takes longer than usual When the CF card contains a large number of clips some operations may take longer than usual Save your clips LL 155 and initialize the CF card J 45 Cannot delete a photo The photo is protected Remove the protection L 163 The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure Change the position of the LOCK switch Cannot copy clips There is not enough available space on the CF card being copied to or the CF card already contains the maximum number of clips 999 clips Delete some clips L 136 to free some space or replace the CF card Indicators and Onscreen Displays Z appears in red on the screen Battery pack is exhausted Replace or charge the battery pack appears on the screen The camera cannot communicate with the battery pack attached so the remaining battery time cannot be displayed The tally lamp does not illuminate Set Other Functions Tally Lamp to On The tally lamp flashes quickly amp e e 4 flashes per second The battery pack is exhausted Replace or charge the battery pack There is not enou
268. the output settings for each terminal Also displays the gamma and color space settings of the video on the screen and the o 179 video to be recorded on a CF card Camera Displays settings related to recording such as ISO speed gain iris and shutter speed increments peripheral illumination correction and 179 attached lens model information a uc 2d Allows you to verify the current function of each assignable button e o 180 Audio Displays settings related to audio e e 180 Media Displays information about the recording media o o 181 4K 2K MXF 1 2 e 7 4K 2K MXF 2 2 Displays the settings for the video terminals and for MXF clips 181 Video o Metadata 1 2 Metadata 2 2 Displays the user memo and other metadata that will be recorded e E 182 with clips Battery Hour Meter Allows you to check the remaining battery time battery life and how i o 183 long the camera has been in operation 2 Data 1 3 fi Data 2 3 Displays the settings for the custom picture file that will be 183 E Data 3 3 embedded into clips 184 Wi Fi Remote 1 4 to Displays settings related to the configuration of the optional WFT E6 Wi Fi Remote AAT Wireless File Transmitter and the Wi Fi network setup For more details download the WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter Guide for o Canon Camcorders PDF file from your local Canon Web site and follow the instructions to complete the necessary setup only Does not appear in
269. the upper left of the screen Depending on the aspect ratio of the 4K or 2K video you can select the resizing method when recordings on the CF card are tout l output ELI 63 start Recording starts The tally lamp illuminates and REC appears on the upper center of the screen If an external recorder is connected to the HD SD SDI terminal a signal is sent instructing it to start recording 8 REC appears on the center right of the screen e You can use the START STOP button on the back of the camera the front of the camera next to the lens mount or the monitor unit 5 Press the START STOP button to pause the recording e Recording stops and a signal is sent to the external recorder to pause the recording When recording on a CF card a clip is recorded and the camera enters record pause mode STBY 9v or STBY appears at the top of the screen The tally lamp will also go out Recording Video Locking the Controls in Recording Mode Once in camera mode you can set the GME switch to f key lock to lock all the physical controls buttons and switches on the camera save for the START STOP button With the f Other Functions 93 Custom Function 3 fa START STOP setting you can even choose to lock all buttons including the START STOP button In such case you can use Wi Fi Remote to operate the camera This is useful in preventing settings from being changed due to inadvertently pressing one of the buttons Ret
270. to 31 Default O Chroma Adjusts the color saturation for area B This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Area Adjusts the color range for area B This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Y Level Adjusts the brightness for area B This setting can be adjusted from O to 31 Default 16 Area B Revision Sets the amount of correction for area B Level Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 122 Custom Picture Settings Phase Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase This setting can be adjusted from 18 to 18 Default 0 Other Functions Setup Level Adjusts the black level set by the Black and Master Pedestal settings Level Determines the amount of adjustment to be made This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 50 Default 0 Press Compresses the dynamic range of the video signal so that it does not exceed 100 Available options are On and Off Default Off Clip At 10096 When the video signal exceeds 100 this function clips the white level at 100 Available options are On and Off Default Off Gi NOTES e When an optional RC V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera the following custom picture settings can be changed using the buttons and dials on the remote controller They cannot be changed from the camera while the RC V100 is connected If nece
271. tomized menu I 177 PER Camera Setup menu camera mode only Menu item Submenu Setting options T IS0 Gain Select IS0 Gain Extended Range On Off 20 ISO Increment 1 stop 1 3 stop Gain Normal Fine Iris Iris Increment 1 2 stop 1 3 stop Fine i Zoom lris Correct On Off Shutter Mode Speed Angle Clear Scan Slow Off B Shutter Increment 1 3 stop 1 4 stop Color Space BT 709 DCI P3 C Gamut BT 2020 144 fi CINEMA Locked On Off 58 ABB Cancel OK 48 Color Bars Enable On Off Ds Type SMPTE EBU ARIB Periph Illum Corr On Off 34 The default value depends on the country region or purchase 2k 4K 2K MXF Setup menu camera mode only Menu item Submenu Setting options I System Priority 4K 2K MXF 60 System Frequency 59 94 Hz 50 00 Hz 24 00 Hz 60 167 Menu Options Menu item 4K 4096 3840 Submenu Mode Setting options RAW HRAW 4K1K RAW 60 Resolution When Mode is set to RAW 4096x2160 3840x2160 When Mode is set to HRAW 4096x1080 3840x1080 When Mode is set to 4K1K RAW 4096x1080 62 Frame Rate For 59 94 Hz recordings 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P For 50 00 Hz recordings 50 00P 25 00P For 24 00 Hz recordings the frame rate is set to 24 00P and cannot be changed 62 2K 2048 1920 Mode
272. tor also has a 1 896 1 aspect ratio Side Crop The left and right sides of the image are cropped so that the central part of the image fits within the Screen a A Original 4K or 2K image Letterbox setting Squeeze setting Side Crop setting 1 896 1 1 NOTES e For Letterbox because the camera uses a simple conversion process vertically diagonal lines may appear jagged e For MON terminal output during 4K mode because the camera uses a simple conversion process color shifting may be visible e f you set an assignable button to Resize MON Output LZ 111 you can press the button to switch the resizing method Applying a LUT to Canon Log Gamma When checking video recorded with Canon Log gamma on an external 2k 4K 2K MXF Setup monitor connected to a MON terminal or the HD SD SDI terminal you can apply a LUT MON 1 amp 2 1 Open the Select submenu under LUT 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 3 MON 1 amp 2 or HD SD SDI 3 Select Select 2 Select the desired option and then press SET 3 Press LUT Rec 709 e The selected LUT will be applied e You can also apply the LUT with the 4K 4K 2K MXF 3 MON 1 amp 2 or HD SD SDI 3 LUT Options BT 709 Converts to a gamma curve based on the ITU R BT 709 standard Wide DR Converts to a gamma curve with a wide dynamic range DCI Converts to a gamma curve suitable for display on a monitor with a gamma of 2 6 Available from the MON t
273. trol information cannot be read by the Canon XF Utility software or associated plugins Troubleshooting Cannot record Cannot record on a CF card The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder error Turn off the camera and back on again Then remove the CF card being used and reinsert it Alternatively replace the CF card If this does not solve the problem consult a Canon Service Center e Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot 189 be read by the Canon XF Utility software or associated plugins Cannot switch CF card slots The SLOT SELECT button was pressed while the camera is recording Wait until recording is finished to change the selected CF card slot CF A CF B Buffer overflow Recording was stopped The data transfer rate was too high for the CF card in use and the recording was stopped Use a recommended card LL 43 CF A CF B Cannot restore Could not recover data on the CF card Save your clips L 155 and initialize the CF card T 45 CF A CF B error The CF card cannot be recognized or cannot be accessed Check that the CF card is inserted correctly and not malfunctioning CF A CF B Management data is not supported and will be deleted This message may appear if you insert into the camera a CF card that was initialized by a Canon professional camcorder Check the contents of the CF card CF A CF B Manage
274. u setting will be registered to the customizable slot and to the assignable button e The name of the selected menu setting will be listed instead of User Setting NONE and the customizable slot will be marked by a xr Assignable Buttons 1 NOTES e You can check the two Assign Button status screens QA 180 to see what functions are set for the assignable buttons 112 You can reset only the functions assigned to the assignable buttons without affecting other camera settings BEEN with the f Other Functions 3 Reset 9 Assignable Buttons function All the assignable buttons will return to their default function Using an Assignable Button After you assign a function to one of the buttons press the button to activate the function For some functions an options menu may appear In such case select the desired option and then press SET Assignable Functions Functions can be set separately in CAMERA mode and MEDIA mode Refer to the following table for assignable functions and available modes Function name Description CAMERA MEDIA BA ND Cycles through the ND filter settings in order progressively darken o 73 ND Cycles through the ND filter settings in reverse order progressively brighter e 73 PEAKING Turns peaking on off o 80 ZEBRA Turns zebra patterns on off o 83 M Weveform mentor Veces of e
275. umed and not included in the procedure Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF 1 Press the MENU button e The menu opens with the orange selection frame indicating the menu item that was selected the previous time the menu was closed unless the camera was turned off 2 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired submenu 3 Push the joystick right or press SET e The orange selection frame will appear on a menu item in the submenu e Press the CANCEL button push the joystick left or select gt to return to the previous submenu 4 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired menu item e f submenu contains many menu items a scroll bar will appear on the right side of the submenu indicating that you must scroll up or down to see other menu items e A mark next to a menu item indicates another submenu Repeat steps 3 and 4 30 Using the Menus 5 Push the joystick right or press SET e The orange selection frame will appear on a setting option e Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous submenu 6 Push the joystick up down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired setting option and then press SET e Depending on the menu item additional selections may be necessary 7 Press the MENU button to close the menu 1 NOTES e Unavailable items may appear grayed out e Pressing the MENU button at any time closes the menu e When an optional R
276. under some types of fluorescent mercury or sodium lamps This is not a malfunction You may be able to reduce the symptoms by setting the shutter mode to Speed and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system 1 50 or 1 100 for 50 Hz systems 1 60 or 1 120 for 60 Hz systems May not be available depending on the frame rate Audio cannot be recorded An external microphone connected to the XLR terminal requires phantom power Set the XLR terminal switch to MIC 48V LT 93 The camera s MIC terminal is given priority over the XLR terminals To record audio from the XLR terminals be sure not to connect any microphones to the MIC terminal Audio is recorded at an extremely low level When using the XLR terminals The AUDIO LEVEL switch is set to M and the recording level is set too low When using the MIC terminal Audio Setup 3 Audio Input 9 MIC Mode is set to Manual and the MIC Level setting is too low Check the audio level meter on the screen or rear panel and adjust the audio level correctly LL 94 95 The microphone attenuator is on Turn off the microphone attenuator 7 95 96 Sound is distorted or is recorded at lower levels When recording near loud sounds such as fireworks shows or concerts sound may become distorted or it may not be recorded at the actual levels Activate the microphone attenuator L 95 96 or adjust the audio recording level manually Re
277. urn the EMAI switch to the CAMERA position to reactivate the controls The Wi Fi Remote application also has a key lock function that is limited only to the controls on the application s screens you will still be able to use the controls on the camera Press x to lock the application s controls press ia to reactivate them N CAMERA A OFFe J lt A MEDIA A About Clips When the camera records an MXF clip it also assigns a 6 character clip name consisting of a 2 character prefix letters or numerals and 4 numerals for example AA0001 The last 4 numbers serve as a running counter that increases every time a clip is recorded You can set the initial clip name in advance using the 3 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 Clip Name 3 Title Prefix and Number Setting settings You cannot change the clip name after the clip is recorded In 4K and 2K modes the clip name is included with the video signal that is output from the 3G SDI terminals If you use the software Cinema RAW Development to develop RAW clips recorded with an external recorder and export them MXF clips recorded on a CF card and the exported files can be given similar names to make post production more efficient In the following cases the clip name is not sent to the external recorder e During MXF mode e When the CF card in the camera cannot be recorded on does not have enough available space or has an access error e During 4K and 2K
278. ustom picture files in the camera will be replaced e For your protection when the camera s settings are saved on an SD card the following settings under f Other Functions 9 Wi Fi Remote are not saved the encryption key WEP index key in the wireless LAN setup of each of the configuration files No 1 to No 5 and the password in the camera settings e Only camera settings from other C500 C500 PL cameras can be used with this camera f Other Functions Transfer Menu s Saving and Loading Camera Settings 126 Playback 127 Playing Back MXF Clips m This section explains how to play back clips recorded on a CF card For details on playing back clips using an external monitor refer to Connecting to an External Monitor LL 146 For details on viewing photos on the SD card refer to Viewing Photos LL 161 You cannot use this camera to play back video recorded in 4K or 2K mode on an external recorder For details on developing RAW clips in order to play them back refer to Developing RAW Clips LL 152 Operating modes MEDIA Clip Index Screen Playback functions are accessed from the clip index screen To open the clip index screen set the camera to MEDIA mode If the CF card contains a clip with a system frequenoy that is different from the camera s current settings then playback is not possible In such case change the SI 4K 2K MXF Setup amp System Frequency setting as necessary
279. ut is automatically set to 1920x1080 so this procedure is not necessary MON 1 amp 2 1 Open the Resolution submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 MON 1 amp 2 3 Resolution Resolution 2 Select 2048x1080 or 1920x1080 and then press SET 1920x1080 Selecting the Scan Mode of the Output When the recording mode of the video configuration is HRAW 4K1K 3k 4K 2K MXF Setup RAW or MZA 10 bit this procedure is not necessary because this function will be set automatically based on the resolution MON 1 amp 2 1 Open the Scan Mode submenu 4K 4K 2K MXF Setup 3 MON 1 amp 2 3 Scan Mode Scan Mode 2 Select P or PsF and then press SET P Selecting the Resizing Method When the recorded video and video output have a different aspect ratio 2k 4K 2K MXF Setup perform the following procedure to select how the video is output 1 Open the Resize Output submenu MON 1 amp 2 4K AK 2K MXF Setup 93 MON 1 amp 2 3 Resize Output 2 Select the desired option and then press SET Resize Output Letterbox 148 Connecting to an External Monitor Opti qm The picture is reduced in size while maintaining the aspect ratio and black letterbox bars are added to the top and bottom of the image so that the picture has a 16 9 aspect ratio Squeeze The image is squeezed from the left and right so that the entire image fits within the screen The image will appear normal if the external moni
280. utton ideal for stop motion animation Software for aiding the production workflow The Cinema RAW Development software which can be downloaded from your local Canon Web site can develop the 4K RAW data recorded with an external recorder and export it as a standard file type such as DPX This helps make a smooth transition to the color grading process Audio Sound is recorded as 2 channel linear PCM audio 16 bit 48 kHz You can use the MIC terminal for microphones with a 3 5 mm mini stereo plug or the two XLR audio input terminals with phantom power supply when recording Video scopes Check the brightness of the image using the waveform monitor LL 100 the color of the image using the vectorscope Q4 101 or the focus using the edge monitor Q 101 Table of Contents 1 Introduction 11 About this Manual 11 Conventions Used in this Manual 11 Supplied Accessories 13 Names of Parts 14 Monitor Unit 19 Handle Unit 19 4K Workflow Overview 21 Color Grading with the ACES Workflow 22 2 Preparations 23 Preparing the Power Supply 23 Using a Battery Pack 23 Using a Household Power Outlet 25 Turning the Camera On and Off 26 Date Time and Language Settings 27 Setting the Date and Time 27 Changing the Time Zone 27 Displaying the Date and Time while Recording 28 Changing the Language 28 Using the Menus 29 Selecting an Option from the Menu 29 Using the Customized Submenu My Menu 30 Preparing the Camera 32 Preparing t
281. veform monitor Vectorscope gt Off e Alternatively you can display the video scopes using fr Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Setting Select VFM for the waveform monitor VS for the vectorscope or Edge Mon for the edge monitor Configuring the Waveform Monitor f Other Functions The camera s waveform monitor function offers 5 modes You can also change the gain dd WFM LCD Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4K 2K MXF Waveform Monitor 1 Open the Waveform Monitor submenu f Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Waveform Monitor Line 2 Select the desired option and then press SET e f you do not need to change the gain you do not need to perform steps 3 and 4 3 Open the waveform monitor Gain submenu f Other Functions 3 WFM LCD 3 Gain under Waveform Monitor 4 Select 1x or 2x and then press SET Options Line oets the waveform monitor to line display mode Line Spot The waveform of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the Line mode waveform Field oets the waveform monitor to field display mode RGB Functions like an RGB parade scope YPbPr Functions like a YPbPr parade scope Video Scopes Configuring the Vectorscope f Other Functions The camera s vectorscope function offers 2 modes You can also change the gain oo WFM LCD Operating modes CAMERA MEDIA 4k 2K MxF 101 Vectorscope
282. ver LL 41 57 CF card slot cover switches for CF card slots A top and B bottom LL 43 58 RESET button LL 187 59 SLOT SELECT CF card slot selection button LD 46 128 60 CF card release buttons for CF card slots A top and B bottom LL 44 61 BATT OPEN open battery compartment switch LL 24 62 Battery compartment cover LL 24 63 CFE CF card slot A and CFE CF card slot B access indicators LL 44 17 Names of Parts 18 64 64 Tape measure hooks 67 Strap mounts LL 39 Use the hooks to accurately measure the distance 68 Accessory shoe with mounting hole for from the focal plane 0 64 cm 1 4 in screws 65 Focal plane marks For attaching accessories such as the optional 66 Socket for the WFT Attachment Bracket Q4 50 VL 10Li Il Battery Video Light 69 70 69 TB 1 Tripod Base for tripods with 0 95 cm 3 8 in 71 Attachment sockets for the optional TA 100 Tripod screws LL 38 Adapter Q 38 70 Tripod socket LL 38 72 Tripod base screws L 38 Monitor Unit Operation panel A 20 e as HB AB34 Ti e 1 LCD panel 2 MIRROR button LQ 37 3 Microphone lock screw LT 92 Handle Unit Names of Parts 4 Microphone holder LZ 92 Microphone cable clamp LZ 92 6 XLR terminals CH1 right and CH2 left LL 92 O1 1 Mounting hole for 0 64 cm 1 4 in screws 2 Front accessory shoe 3 Top accessory shoe 4 Lock screw LZ 39 19
283. well Push the joystick down or turn the SELECT dial down to return to the Clip Info screen 134 MXF Clip Operations Displaying Custom Picture Settings When displaying the Clip Info screen of a clip that has a custom picture file recorded with it push the joystick down or turn the SELECT dial down to display the first of three screens with the clip s custom picture settings R Data 1 3 screen Push the joystick down or turn the SELECT dial down to switch the RM Data 2 3 screen gt W Data 3 3 screen gt Lens amp MM screen gt Clip Info screen Adding M Marks or M Marks If you add an OK mark M or check mark M to a clip you can later display an index screen that shows only the clips with an f mark or only the clips with a B mark Furthermore you cannot delete clips with an f mark SO you can use it to protect important clips Adding an M Mark or M Mark during Playback To add an OK mark M or check mark M to a clip during playback or playback pause you must first set an assignable button to Add IR Mark or Add M Mark in advance 1 Set an assignable button to Add Id Mark or Add M Mark LL 111 e To add both types of clip marks to different clips set one assignable button to Add I Mark and another assignable button to Add M Mark 2 During playback or playback pause press the assignable button to add the clip mark e A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip
284. wfinder make sure to attach the lens cap to the lens and the viewfinder cap to the viewfinder Be careful of heat generated by lighting equipment Do not disassemble the camera If the camera does not function properly consult qualified service personnel Do not touch the lens contacts on the lens mount Dirty contacts may cause a poor contact between the camera and the lens resulting in incorrect operation of the camera After removing the lens make sure to attach the body cap to the lens mount and the lens cap and dust cap to the lens Handle the camera with care Do not subject the camera to shocks or vibration as this may cause damage When using the shoulder strap do not allow the camera to swing and hit an object Long term storage If you do not intend to use the camera for a long time store it in a place free of dust in low humidity and at temperatures not higher than 30 C 86 F Battery Pack DANGER Treat the battery pack with care e Keep it away from fire or it might explode e Do not expose the battery pack to temperature higher than 60 C 140 F Do not leave it near a heater or inside a car in hot weather e Do not try to disassemble or modify it e Do not drop it or subject it to shocks e Do not get it wet Handling Precautions e Dirty terminals may cause a poor contact between the battery pack and the camera Wipe the terminals with a soft cloth Long term storage 193 e Stor
285. y displayed while adjusting the setting Only when an optional WFT E6 Wireless File Transmitter is connected to the camera Adjusting the Brightness of the Rear Panel Repeatedly pressing the xx backlight button will change the brightness of the rear panel in the following order Backlight on bright Backlight on dim gt Backlight off Of 58 Recording Video Canon Log Gamma and CINEMA Preset The Canon Log gamma setting makes full use of the newly developed image sensor to offer spectacular dynamic range You can easily set the camera to use a number of preset picture related settings especially designed with professional cinematography and PA Camera Setup motion picture production in mind With the CINEMA preset settings the gamma and color matrix LL 117 will be set to the advanced Canon Log Sg CINEMA Locked setting which makes full use of the newly developed image sensor to offer spectacular dynamic range On the other hand other custom picture settings will not be available On system Output terminal fd CINEMA Locked c e Picture setting priority Recording destination setting 3G SDI terminals Canon Log gamma 4K MON terminals Canon Log gamma with or without a LUT applied 2K T On CINEMA preset settings with Canon Log gamma car Off Based on custom picture settings On CINEMA preset settings with Canon Log gamma MXF CF card Off Based on custom picture settings

Canon C500 Instruction Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents